ConceptioArchiveECMA International
ECMA Internationalopen access

ECMA-382 — 120 mm (8,54 Gbytes per side) and 80 mm (2,66 Gbytes per side) DVD recordable dsk for dual layer (DVD-R for DL) (June 2010)

ECMA International · ECMA International
ECMA International · Standards · License: Open Access
Open Source ↗Direct PDF ↓
dualdvdecmaecmainternationalgbyteslayerrecordableside
ecma, standard, ecma international, specification, ecma-382, ecma 382, 382, 120, gbytes, per, side, and, dvd, recordable, dsk, for, dual, layer, dvd-r

ECMA-382 2nd Edition / June 2010

120 mm (8,54 Gbytes per side) and 80 mm (2,66 Gbytes per side) DVD Recordable Disk for Dual Layer (DVD-R for DL)

Reference number ECMA-123:2009

© Ecma International 2009

COPYRIGHT PROTECTED DOCUMENT

© Ecma International 2010

Contents

Page

Section 1 — General ........................................................................................................................................... 1 1

Scope ...................................................................................................................................................... 1

2 2.1 2.2 2.3

Conformance ......................................................................................................................................... 1 Optical Disk ............................................................................................................................................ 1 Generating system ................................................................................................................................ 2 Receiving system .................................................................................................................................. 2

3

Normative references ............................................................................................................................ 2

4

Terms and definitions ........................................................................................................................... 2

5 5.1 5.2

Conventions and notations .................................................................................................................. 6 Representation of numbers .................................................................................................................. 6 Names ..................................................................................................................................................... 6

6

Acronyms ............................................................................................................................................... 6

7

General description of a disk ............................................................................................................... 8

8 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.2 8.3

General requirement ............................................................................................................................. 9 Environments ......................................................................................................................................... 9 Test environment ................................................................................................................................... 9 Operating environment ......................................................................................................................... 9 Storage environment ........................................................................................................................... 10 Transportation ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Safety requirements ............................................................................................................................ 10 Flammability ......................................................................................................................................... 10

9 9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.3 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2

Reference measurement devices ...................................................................................................... 10 Pick-Up Head (PUH) ............................................................................................................................ 10 PUH for measuring recorded disks ................................................................................................... 10 PUH for measuring unrecorded disks ............................................................................................... 12 Measurement conditions .................................................................................................................... 13 Recorded and unrecorded disk ......................................................................................................... 13 Recorded disk ...................................................................................................................................... 13 Unrecorded disk .................................................................................................................................. 13 Normalized servo transfer function ................................................................................................... 14 Reference servo for axial tracking ..................................................................................................... 14 Recorded disk ...................................................................................................................................... 14 Unrecorded disk .................................................................................................................................. 16 Reference servo for radial tracking ................................................................................................... 17 Recorded disk ...................................................................................................................................... 17 Unrecorded disk .................................................................................................................................. 18

Section 2 — Dimensional, mechanical and physical characteristics of the disk ...................................... 20 10 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.6.1 10.7

Dimensional characteristics ............................................................................................................... 20 Overall dimensions ............................................................................................................................. 21 First transition area ............................................................................................................................. 22 Second transition area ........................................................................................................................ 22 Clamping Zone ..................................................................................................................................... 22 Third transition area ............................................................................................................................ 22 R-Information Zone ............................................................................................................................. 23 Sub-divisions of the R-Information Zone .......................................................................................... 23 Information Zone ................................................................................................................................. 23

© Ecma International 2010

i

10.7.1 10.8 10.8.1 10.9 10.10 10.11 10.12

Sub-divisions of the Information zone ............................................................................................. 23 Track geometry ................................................................................................................................... 25 Track Path ............................................................................................................................................ 25 Channel bit length............................................................................................................................... 26 Rim area ............................................................................................................................................... 26 Remark on tolerances ........................................................................................................................ 26 Label ..................................................................................................................................................... 26

11 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.5.1 11.5.2

Mechanical parameters ...................................................................................................................... 27 Mass ..................................................................................................................................................... 27 Moment of inertia ................................................................................................................................ 27 Dynamic imbalance ............................................................................................................................ 27 Sense of rotation................................................................................................................................. 27 Runout ................................................................................................................................................. 27 Axial runout ......................................................................................................................................... 27 Radial runout ....................................................................................................................................... 27

12 12.1 12.1.1 12.1.2 12.1.3 12.1.4 12.2 12.3 12.3.1 12.3.2

Optical parameters ............................................................................................................................. 28 Recorded and unrecorded disk parameters .................................................................................... 28 Index of refraction............................................................................................................................... 28 Thickness of the transparent substrate ........................................................................................... 28 Angular deviation................................................................................................................................ 29 Birefringence of the transparent substrate ...................................................................................... 29 Recorded disk reflectivity .................................................................................................................. 29 Unrecorded disk parameters ............................................................................................................. 29 Polarity of reflectivity modulation ..................................................................................................... 29 Recording power sensitivity variation .............................................................................................. 29

Section 3 — Operational signals .................................................................................................................... 30 13 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.3.1 13.3.2 13.3.3 13.4 13.4.1 13.4.2 13.4.3 13.5 13.5.1 13.5.2 13.6

Operational signals for recorded disk .............................................................................................. 30 Measurement conditions ................................................................................................................... 30 Read conditions .................................................................................................................................. 30 Recorded disk high frequency (HF) signals .................................................................................... 30 Modulated amplitude .......................................................................................................................... 30 Signal asymmetry ............................................................................................................................... 31 Cross-track signal............................................................................................................................... 31 Quality of signals ................................................................................................................................ 31 Jitter ..................................................................................................................................................... 31 Random errors .................................................................................................................................... 31 Defects ................................................................................................................................................. 31 Servo signals....................................................................................................................................... 32 Differential phase tracking error signal ............................................................................................ 32 Tangential push-pull signal ............................................................................................................... 32 Groove wobble signal ........................................................................................................................ 34

14 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.3.1 14.4 14.4.1 14.4.2 14.5 14.5.1 14.5.2 14.5.3

Operational signals for the unrecorded disk ................................................................................... 35 Measurement conditions ................................................................................................................... 35 Recording conditions ......................................................................................................................... 35 Write strategy for media testing ........................................................................................................ 35 Definition of the write pulse ............................................................................................................... 36 Servo signals....................................................................................................................................... 37 Radial push-pull tracking error signal .............................................................................................. 37 Defects ................................................................................................................................................. 38 Addressing signals ............................................................................................................................. 38 Land Pre-Pit signal ............................................................................................................................. 38 Groove wobble signal ........................................................................................................................ 40 Relation in phase between wobble and Land Pre-Pit ..................................................................... 40

Section 4 — Data format ................................................................................................................................. 42 15

ii

General ................................................................................................................................................. 42

© Ecma International 2010

16 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4

Data Frames ......................................................................................................................................... 42 Identification Data (ID) ........................................................................................................................ 43 ID Error Detection Code ...................................................................................................................... 43 RSV ....................................................................................................................................................... 44 Error Detection Code .......................................................................................................................... 44

17

Scrambled Frames .............................................................................................................................. 44

18

ECC Block configuration .................................................................................................................... 45

19

Recording Frames ............................................................................................................................... 47

20

Modulation............................................................................................................................................ 48

21

Physical Sectors .................................................................................................................................. 48

22

Suppress control of the d.c. component .......................................................................................... 50

23 23.1 23.2 23.3

Linking scheme ................................................................................................................................... 51 Structure of linking .............................................................................................................................. 51 2K-Link and 32K-Link .......................................................................................................................... 52 Lossless-Link ....................................................................................................................................... 52

Section 5 — Format of the Information Zone ................................................................................................ 55 24 24.1 24.2

General description of the Information Zone ................................................................................... 55 Layout of the Information Zone ......................................................................................................... 55 Physical Sector numbering ................................................................................................................ 56

25 25.1 25.1.1 25.1.2 25.1.3 25.1.4 25.1.5 25.1.6 25.1.7 25.2 25.3 25.3.1 25.3.2

Lead-in Zone, Middle Zone and Lead-out Zone ................................................................................ 57 Lead-in Zone ........................................................................................................................................ 57 Initial Zone ............................................................................................................................................ 57 Buffer Zone 0 ....................................................................................................................................... 57 R-Physical Format Information Zone ................................................................................................ 58 Reference Code Zone .......................................................................................................................... 61 Buffer Zone 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 61 Control Data Zone ............................................................................................................................... 62 Extra Border Zone ............................................................................................................................... 75 Middle Zone .......................................................................................................................................... 75 Lead-out Zone ...................................................................................................................................... 76 Structure of Lead-out Zone with Format4 RMD................................................................................ 76 Superficial Extra Border Zone ............................................................................................................ 76

Section 6 — Format of the Unrecorded Zone ................................................................................................ 78 26 26.1 26.2 26.3

General description of the Unrecorded Zone ................................................................................... 78 Layout of the Unrecorded Zone ......................................................................................................... 78 ECC Block address ............................................................................................................................. 79 ECC Block numbering ......................................................................................................................... 79

27 27.1 27.2 27.3 27.3.1 27.3.2 27.3.3 27.3.4 27.3.5 27.3.6 27.3.7 27.3.8

Pre-pit Data format .............................................................................................................................. 80 General description ............................................................................................................................. 80 Pre-pit block structure ........................................................................................................................ 82 Pre-pit data block configuration ........................................................................................................ 84 Relative address .................................................................................................................................. 86 ECC Block address data configuration ............................................................................................. 86 Parity A and Parity B ........................................................................................................................... 86 Field ID0 ................................................................................................................................................ 88 Field ID1 ................................................................................................................................................ 89 Field ID2 ................................................................................................................................................ 91 Field ID3 and Field ID4 ........................................................................................................................ 92 Field ID5 ................................................................................................................................................ 94

28 28.1 28.2

Data structure of R-Information Zone and ODTA ............................................................................. 94 Layout of Disk Testing Area and Recording Management Area .................................................... 94 Structure of the Disk Testing Area .................................................................................................... 95

© Ecma International 2010

iii

28.3 Data configuration of the Recording Management Area (RMA) .................................................... 97 28.3.1 Sector format of the Recording Management Area......................................................................... 97 28.3.2 Recording Management Data (Format1 RMD and Format4 RMD) ................................................. 99 Annex A (normative) Measurement of the angular deviation  ................................................................. 129 Annex B (normative) Measurement of birefringence ................................................................................. 131 Annex C (normative) Measurement of the differential phase tracking error ........................................... 135 Annex D (normative) Measurement of light reflectance............................................................................. 139 Annex E (normative) Tapered cone for disk clamping ............................................................................... 141 Annex F (normative) Measurement of jitter ................................................................................................. 143 Annex G (normative) 8-to-16 Modulation with RLL (2,10) requirements .................................................. 147 Annex H (normative) Optimum Power Control ........................................................................................... 157 Annex I (normative) Measurement of the groove wobble amplitude ........................................................ 159 Annex J (normative) Measurement methods for the operational signals for an unrecorded disk ....... 161 Annex K (normative) NBCA Code ................................................................................................................. 163 Annex L (normative) Border Zone ................................................................................................................ 169 Annex M (normative) Measurement method of the Land Pre-Pit signal ................................................... 183 Annex N (normative) Construction of Information Zone............................................................................ 185 Annex O (normative) Recording order ......................................................................................................... 187 Annex P (normative) Clearance in the number of sectors ......................................................................... 189 Annex Q (normative) Anchor Point Re-mapping ........................................................................................ 191 Annex R (informative) Measurement method of the Space layer thickness in a disk ............................. 193 Annex S (informative) Transportation .......................................................................................................... 195

iv

© Ecma International 2010

Introduction Ecma Technical Committee TC31 was established in 1984 for the standardization of Optical Disks and Optical Disk Cartridges (ODC). Since its establishment, the Committee has made major contributions to ISO/IEC JTC 1/SC 23 toward the development of International Standards for optical disks. Numerous standards have been developed by TC31 and published by E cma, almost all of which have also been adopted by ISO/IEC under the fast-track procedure as International Standards. The following Ecma Standards for DVD 120 mm and 80 mm have been published by Ecma and adopted by ISO/IEC JTC 1. Those standards are based on original specifications from The DVD Forum. rd

ECMA-267 (2001) ISO/IEC 16448

120 mm DVD-Read-Only Disk, 3 edition

ECMA-268 (2001) ISO/IEC 16449

80 mm DVD-Read-Only Disk, 3 edition

ECMA-272 (1999) ISO/IEC 16824

120 mm DVD Rewritable Disk (DVD-RAM), 2nd edition

ECMA-273 (1998) ISO/IEC 16825

Case for 120 mm DVD-RAM Disks, 1 edition

ECMA-279 (1998) ISO/IEC 20563

80 mm (1,23 Gbytes per side) and 120 mm (3,95 Gbytes per side) DVD-Recordable Disk st (DVD-R), 1 edition

ECMA-330 (2005) ISO/IEC 17592

120 mm (4,7 Gbytes per side) and 80 mm (1,46 Gbytes per side) DVD Rewritable Disk rd (DVD-RAM), 3 edition

ECMA-331 (2004) ISO/IEC 17594

Cases for 120 mm and 80 mm DVD-RAM Disks, 2 edition

ECMA-338 (2002) ISO/IEC 17342

80 mm (1,46 Gbytes per side) and 120 mm (4,70 Gbytes per side) DVD Re-recordable st Disk (DVD-RW), 1 edition

ECMA-359 (2004) ISO/IEC 23912

80 mm (1,46 Gbytes per side) and 120 mm (4,70 Gbytes per side) DVD Recordable Disk st (DVD-R), 1 edition

ECMA-382 (2008) ISO/IEC 12862

120 mm (8,54 Gbytes per side) and 80 mm (2,66 Gbytes per side) DVD Recordable Disk st for Dual Layer (DVD-R for DL), 1 edition

rd

st

nd

ECMA-384 (2008) 120 mm (8,54 Gbytes per side) and 80 mm (2,66 Gbytes per side) DVD Rest recordable Disk for Dual Layer (DVD-RW for DL), 1 edition ISO/IEC 13170 In April 2007, nine members proposed to TC31 to develop a standard for 120 mm and 80 mm dual layer DVD Recordable optical disks using Organic Dye recording technology and TC31 adopted this project that has resulted in this Ecma Standard. In December 2009, a proposal was made to TC31 to update this Ecma Standard for editorial corrections and clarifications and TC31 approved this proposal that has resulted in the second edition of ECMA-382. This Ecma Standard specifies two Types of dual layer Recordable optical disks, one (Type 1S) making use of recording on only a single side of the disk and yielding a nominal capacity of 8,54 Gbytes for a 120 mm disk and 2,66 Gbytes for an 80 mm disk, the other (Type 2S) making use of recording on both sides of the disk and yielding a nominal capacity of 17,08 Gbytes for a 120 mm disk and 5,32 Gbytes for an 80 mm disk.

This Ecma Standard has been adopted by the General Assembly of June 2010.

© Ecma International 2010

v

"DISCLAIMER This document and possible translations of it may be copied and furnished to others, and derivative works that comment on or otherwise explain it or assist in it s implementation may be prepared, copied, published, and distributed, in whole or in part, without restriction of any kind, provided that the above copyright notice and this section are included on all such copies and derivative works. However, this document itself may not be modified in any way, including by removing the copyright notice or references to Ecma International, except as needed for the purpose of developing any document or deliverable produced by Ecma International (in which case the rules applied to copyrights must be followed) or as required to translate it into languages other than English . The limited permissions granted above are perpetual and will not be revoked by Ecma International or its successors or assigns. This document and the information contained herein is provided on an "AS IS" basis and ECMA INTERNATIONAL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY THAT THE USE OF THE INFORMATION HEREIN WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY OWNERSHIP RIGHTS OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE."

vi

© Ecma International 2010

120 mm (8,54 Gbytes per side) and 80 mm (2,66 Gbytes per side) DVD Recordable Disk for Dual Layer (DVD-R for DL)

Section 1 — General 1

Scope

This Ecma Standard specifies the mechanical, physical and optical characteristics of a 120 mm and an 80 mm dual layer DVD Recordable disk to enable the interchange of such disks. It specifies the quality of the prerecorded, unrecorded and the recorded signals, the format of the data, the format of the information zone, the format of the unrecorded zone, and the recording method, thereby allowing for information interchange by means of such disks. This disk is identified as a DVD Recordable disk for Dual Layer (DVD-R for DL). This Ecma Standard specifies: 

120 mm and 80 mm nominal diameter disks that may be either single or double sided,

the conditions for conformance,

the environments in which the disk is to be operated and stored,

the mechanical and physical characteristics of the disk, so as to provide mechanical interchange between data processing systems,

the format of the pre-recorded information on an unrecorded disk, including the physical disposition of the tracks and sectors, the error correcting codes and the coding method used,

the format of the data and the recorded information on the disk, including the physical disposition of the tracks and sectors, the error correcting codes and the coding method used,

the characteristics of the signals from pre-recorded and unrecorded areas on the disk, enabling data processing systems to read the pre-recorded information and to write to the disks,

the characteristics of the signals recorded on the disk, enabling data processing systems to read the data from the disk.

This Ecma Standard provides for interchange of disks between disk drives. Together with a standard for volume and file structure, it provides for full data interchange between data processing systems.

2

Conformance

2.1

Optical Disk

A claim of conformance shall specify the type of the disk, i.e. its size and whether it is single-sided or double sided. An optical disk shall be in conformance with this Ecma Standard if it meets the mandatory requirements specified for this type.

© Ecma International 2010

1

2.2

Generating system

A generating system shall be in conformance with this Ecma Standard if the optical disk it generates is in accordance with 2.1.

2.3

Receiving system

A receiving system shall be in conformance with this Ecma Standard if it is able to handle an optical disk according to 2.1.

3

Normative references

The following referenced documents are indispensable for the application of this document. For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For undated references, the latest edition of the referenced document (including any amendments) applies. ECMA-94, Latin Alphabet No.1, (ISO 8859-1, -2, -3 and -4) ECMA-287, Safety of electronic equipment

4

Terms and definitions

For the purposes of this document, the following terms and definitions apply. 4.1 anchor point physical sector number corresponding to the specific logical sector number such as 16, 256, N-256 and N, where N is the maximum last recorded address in logical volume space NOTE

The information in those sector numbers are used to fix Volume and File structure.

4.2 basic recording speed recording speed at which a disk is under an obligation to be recorded NOTE

A Basic recording speed is mandatory recording speed for each Class.

4.3 block SYNC guard area recorded area in the first ECC block of the contiguous area of which recording is started from the unrecorded area by using 32K-Link 4.4 border zone linking region that prevents the pick-up head from over running on an unrecorded area when a disk is played back in a partially recorded state 4.5 channel bit elements by which, after modulation, the binary values ZERO and ONE are represented on the disk by marks 4.6 clamping zone annular part of the disk within which a clamping force is applied by a clamping device

2

© Ecma International 2010

4.7 class integer number, including 0, that indicates Basic recording speed supported by a disk NOTE A group of recording speeds in a disk must contain at least one Basic recording speed which is mandatory for recording device and disk.

4.8 data zone zone between the Lead-in Zone and the Middle Zone on Layer 0 and the zone between the Middle Zone and the Lead-out Zone on Layer 1, in which user data is recorded NOTE

In Border recording mode, Border Zone is included in Data Zone.

4.9 data recordable zone zone that is available to record user data 4.10 Digital Sum Value DSV arithmetic sum obtained from a bit stream by allocating the decimal value 1 to bits set to ONE and the decimal value –1 to bits set to Zero 4.11 disk at once recording recording mode in which the Lead-in Zone, the user data and the Lead-out Zone are recorded sequentially 4.12 disk reference plane plane defined by the perfectly flat annular surface of an ideal spindle onto which the Clamping Zone of the disk is clamped, and which is normal to the axis of rotation 4.13 Disk Testing Area DTA area used for Optimum Power Control NOTE 1

There are two kinds of the Disk Testing Area on a disk.

NOTE 2 Inner Disk Testing Area (IDTA) is located in the R-Information Zone and situated adjacent to the inside of the Recording Management Area. Outer Disk Testing Area (ODTA) is fixed and situated adjacent to the outside of the fixed Middle Zone. NOTE 3 The optional IDTA can be located on Layer 1 facing the special allocation in the Initial zone on Layer 0 as an option for devices, when NBCA is not applied on a disk. NOTE 4 The ODTA can be added when shifted Middle Zone exists as an option for devices. In this case, added ODTA is called flexible Outer Disk Testing Area (flexible ODTA) and that is situated adjacent to the outside of the shifted Middle Zone on Layer 0 and Layer 1 respectively.

4.14 ECC block address absolute physical address used to define the recording position on the land of each area NOTE 1 This address is pre-recorded as Land Pre-Pits and equal to the bit-inverted numbers from b23 to b4 of the Physical sector number recorded in the groove. NOTE 2 Serially decremented numbers are assigned to blocks from the inner radius to the outer radius on Layer 0 and from the outer radius to the inner radius on Layer 1.

© Ecma International 2010

3

NOTE 3

The first ECC Block address in the Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 is (FF CFFF).

NOTE 4

The bit-inverted number is calculated so that the bit value of one becomes that of zero and vice versa.

NOTE 5

The "ECC Block address" definition is specific to this Standard.

4.15 Error Correction Code ECC mathematical computation yielding check bytes used for the detection and correction of errors in data 4.16 Error Detection Code EDC code designed to detect certain kinds of errors in data NOTE

Error Detection Code consists of data and the error detection parity.

4.17 finalization action for changing into the state where the Lead-in, the Lead-out and the Middle Zones are recorded NOTE 1 After Finalization, the information Zone from the Lead-in Zone to the Middle Zone on Layer 0 and from the Middle Zone to the Lead-out Zone on Layer 1 shall be recorded without any unrecorded areas. NOTE 2

The disk will become write protected once finalized.

4.18 groove wobbled guidance track 4.19 Incremental recording recording mode in which the disk is recorded in several distinct recording operations (for example at different times and using different recording drives) NOTE

In this recording mode, the specified linking scheme shall be used.

4.20 information zone zone comprising the Lead-in Zone, the Data Zone, the Middle Zone and the Lead-out Zone 4.21 initial information zone zone comprising the Lead-in Zone, the Data Recordable Zone, the fixed Middle Zone and the Lead-out Zone 4.22 land area between the grooves 4.23 Land Pre-Pit LPP pits embossed on the land during the manufacture of the disk substrate, which contain address information 4.24 lead-in zone zone comprising Physical sectors adjacent to the inside of the Data Zone on Layer 0

4

© Ecma International 2010

4.25 lead-out zone zone comprising Physical sectors adjacent to the inside of the Data Zone on Layer 1 NOTE When the recording of user data is finished on Layer 0, the Lead-out Zone is located adjacent to the inside of the Middle Zone on Layer 1.

4.26 middle zone zone comprising physical sectors adjacent to the outside of the Data Zone on Layer 0 and Layer 1 respectively NOTE 1

The fixed Middle Zone is located outside of Data Recordable Zone of a disk.

NOTE 2 The shifted Middle Zone can be added at the inner radius than the fixed Middle Zone as an option for devices, depending on the size of the Data Zone and located outside of the Data Zone.

4.27 Recording Management Area RMA area containing the Recording Management Data (RMD), situated adjacent to the inside of the Lead-in Zone on Layer 0 and the Lead-out Zone on Layer 1 respectively 4.28 Recording Management Data RMD information about the recording on the disk, including information on each recording mode NOTE 1

Two kinds of RMD format are specified.

NOTE 2 mode.

Format1 RMD contains the information related to Incremental recording mode and Disk at once recording

NOTE 3 mode.

Format4 RMD contains the information related to Incremental recording mode including Layer jump recording

4.29 r-information zone zone comprising the Inner Disk Testing Area (IDTA) and the Recording Management Area (RMA) 4.30 re-mapping replacement mechanism for physical layer to replace original Anchor point with renewed Anchor point 4.31 rzone ECC blocks that are continuous on a layer and assigned to user data on Layer 0 and/or Layer 1 during Incremental recording mode 4.32 sector smallest addressable part of a track in the information zone of a disk that can be accessed independently of other addressable parts 4.33 substrate transparent layer of the disk, provided for mechanical support of the recording or recorded layer, through which the optical beam accesses the recordable / recorded layer

© Ecma International 2010

5

4.34 track 360 turn of a continuous spiral of recorded marks or groove 4.35 track pitch distance between adjacent average physical track centrelines of the wobbled grooves for the unrecorded disk, or between adjacent physical track centrelines of the successive recorded marks for the recorded disk, measured in the radial direction 4.36 zone annular area of the disk

5

Conventions and notations

5.1

Representation of numbers

A measured value is rounded off to the least significant digit of the corresponding specified value. For instance, it implies that a specified value of 1,26 with a positive tolerance of + 0,01 and a negative tolerance of - 0,02 allows a range of measured values from 1,235 to 1,275. Numbers in decimal notations are represented by the digits 0 to 9. Numbers in hexadecimal notation are represented by the hexadecimal digits 0 to 9 and A to F in parentheses. The setting of bits is denoted by ZERO and ONE. Numbers in binary notations and bit patterns are represented by strings of digits 0 and 1, with the most significant bit shown to the left. Negative values of numbers in binary notation are given as Two’s complement. In each field the data is recorded so that the most significant byte (MSB), identified as Byte 0, is recorded first and the least significant byte (LSB) last. In a field of 8n bits, bit b(8n-1) shall be the most significant bit (msb) and bit b0 the least significant bit (lsb). Bit b(8n-1) is recorded first.

5.2

Names

The names of entities, e.g. specific tracks, fields, areas, zones, etc. are given a capital initial.

6

Acronyms

AP

Amplitude of the land Pre-Pit signal (without wobble amplitude)

AR

Aperture Ratio (of the Land Pre-Pit after recording)

BP

Byte Position

BPF

Band Pass Filter

CLV

Constant Linear Velocity

CNR

Carrier to Noise Ratio

6

© Ecma International 2010

DCC

DC Component suppress control

DSV

Digital Sum Value

ECC

Error Correction Code

EDC

Error Detection Code

HF

High Frequency

ID

Identification Data

LA

Lead-out Attribute

IDTA

Inner Disk Testing Area

IED

ID Error Detection (code)

LPF

Low-Pass Filter

LPP

Land Pre-Pit

LSB

Least Significant Byte

lsb

least significant bit

MSB

Most Significant Byte

msb

most significant bit

NBCA

Narrow Burst Cutting Area

NRZI

Non Return to Zero Inverted

ODTA

Outer Disk Testing Area

OPC

Optimum Power Control

OTP

Opposite Track Path

PBS

Polarizing Beam Splitter

PI

Parity (of the) Inner (code)

PLL

Phase Locked Loop

PO

Parity (of the) Outer (code)

PSN

Physical Sector Number

PTP

Parallel Track Path

PUH

Pick-Up Head

RBP

Relative Byte Position

RBW

Resolution Bandwidth

RESYNC

Re-Synchronization

© Ecma International 2010

7

RMA

Recording Management Area

RMD

Recording Management Data

RS

Reed-Solomon (code)

SYNC

Synchronization

7

General description of a disk

The 120 mm and 80 mm optical disks that are the subject of this Ecma Standard consist of two substrates bonded together by an adhesive layer, so that the recording layers are on the inside. The centring of the disk is performed on the edge of the centre hole of the assembled disk on the side currently read. Clamping is performed in the Clamping Zone. The DVD Recordable Disk for Dual Layer (DVD-R for DL) may be either double-sided or single-sided with respect to the number of recording layers. A double-sided disk has the recording layers on the inside of each substrate. A single-sided disk has one substrate with the recording layers on the inside and a dummy substrate without a recording layer. A recorded disk provides for the data to be read many times by an optical beam of a drive. Figure 1 shows schematically a double-sided (Type 2S) and a single-sided (Type 1S) disk. Type 1S consists of a substrate, two recording layers with a space layer between them, an adhesive layer, and a dummy substrate. Both recording layers can be accessed from one side only. The nominal capacity is 8,54 Gbytes for a 120 mm disk and 2,66 Gbytes for an 80 mm disk. Type 2S consists of two substrates, each having two recording layers with a space layer between them, and an adhesive layer. From one side of the disk only one pair of recording layers can be accessed. The nominal total capacity is 17,08 Gbytes for a 120 mm disk and 5,32 Gbytes for an 80 mm disk.

Dummy Substrate Adhesive Layer Recording Layer 1 Space Layer Recording Layer 0 Substrate

Type 1S

Entrance surface Entrance surface

Type 2S

Entrance surface

Substrate Recording Layer 0 Space Layer Recording Layer 1 Adhesive Layer Recording Layer 1 Space Layer Recording Layer 0 Substrate

Figure 1 — Disk outline

8

© Ecma International 2010

8

General requirement

8.1

Environments

8.1.1

Test environment

The test environment is the environment where the air immediately surrounding the disk has the following properties: a) For dimensional measurements

b) For other measurements

temperature:

23 C  2 C

15 C to 35 C

relative humidity:

45 % to 55 %

45 % to 75 %

atmospheric pressure:

86 kPa to 106 kPa

86 kPa to 106 kPa

Unless otherwise stated, all tests and measurements shall be made in this test environment. 8.1.2

Operating environment

This Ecma Standard requires that an optical disk which meets all mandatory requirements of this Ecma Standard in the specified test environment provides data interchange over the specified ranges of environmental parameters in the operating environment. Disks used for data interchange shall be operated under the following conditions, when mounted in the drive supplied with voltage and measured on the outside surface of the disk. 8.1.2.1

Environmental conditions during reading

The disk exposed to storage conditions shall be conditioned in the operating environment for at least two hours before operating. temperature:

-25 C to 70 C

relative humidity:

3 % to 95 %

absolute humidity:

0,5 g/m to 60 g/m

temperature gradient:

15 C/h max.

3

3

relative humidity gradient: 10 %/h max. There shall be no condensation of moisture on the disk. 8.1.2.2

Environmental conditions during recording

The disk exposed to storage conditions shall be conditioned in the recording environment for at least two hours before operating. temperature:

-5 C to 55 C

relative humidity:

3 % to 95 %

absolute humidity:

0,5 g/m to 30 g/m

3

3

There shall be no condensation of moisture on the disk.

© Ecma International 2010

9

8.1.3

Storage environment

The storage environment is the environment where the air immediately surrounding the optical disk shall have the following properties: temperature:

-20 C to 50 C

relative humidity:

5 % to 90 %

absolute humidity:

1 g/m to 30 g/m

atmospheric pressure:

75 kPa to 106 kPa

temperature variation:

15 C /h max.

3

3

relative humidity variation: 10 %/h max. 8.1.4

Transportation

This Ecma Standard does not specify requirements for transportation; guidance is given in Annex S.

8.2

Safety requirements

The disk shall satisfy the requirements of Standard ECMA-287, when used in the intended manner or in any foreseeable use in an information system.

8.3

Flammability

The disk shall be made from materials that comply with the flammability class for HB materials, or better, as specified in Standard ECMA-287.

9

Reference measurement devices

The reference measurement devices for recorded disks and for unrecorded disks shall be used for the measurements of optical parameters for conformance with this Ecma Standard. The critical components of these devices have specific properties defined in this Clause.

9.1

Pick-Up Head (PUH)

9.1.1

PUH for measuring recorded disks

The optical system for measuring the optical parameters is shown in Figure 2. The optical system shall be used to measure the parameters specified for the recorded disk. Different components and locations of the components are permitted, provided that the performance remains the same as the set-up in Figure 2. The optical system shall be such that the detected light reflected from the entrance surface of the disk is minimized so as not to influence the accuracy of measurement. The combination of the polarizing beam splitter C with the quarter-wave plate D separates the incident optical beam and the beam reflected by the optical disk F. The beam splitter C shall have a p-s intensity reflectance ratio of at least 100. Optics G generates an astigmatic difference and collimates the light reflected by the recorded layer of the optical disk F for astigmatic focusing and read-out. The position of the quadrant photo detector H shall be adjusted so that the light spot becomes a circle the centre of which coincides with the centre of the quadrant photo detector H when the objective lens is focused on the recorded layer. An example of such a photo detector H is shown in Figure 2.

10

© Ecma International 2010

J

Radial direction Ia

Ib

Ic

Id

Quadrant photo

+

Read Channel

Ia Ib Ic Id

detector H H

G

A

B

C

D

E

F

02-0006-A

A Laser diode

F Optical disk

B Collimator lens

G Optics for the astigmatic focusing method

C Polarizing beam splitter

H Quadrant photo detector

D Quarter-wave plate

Ia, Ib, Ic, Id Output currents from the quadrant photo detector

E Objective lens

J d.c. coupled amplifier Figure 2 — Optical system of PUH for measuring recorded disk

The focused optical beam used for reading data shall have the following properties: Wavelength (λ)

650 nm ± 5 nm

Polarization of the light

circular

Polarizing beam splitter

shall be used unless otherwise stated

Numerical aperture

0,60 ± 0,01

Light intensity at the rim of the pupil of the objective lens

60 % to 70 % of the maximum intensity level in radial direction, and over 90 % of the maximum intensity level in the tangential direction

Wave front aberration after passing through 0,033 λ rms max. an ideal substrate (Thickness: 0,6 mm and index of refraction: 1,56) 2

2

Normalized detector size on a disk 100 < A/(M ) < 144 μm , in which A = the total surface area of the quadrant photo detector of the PUH and M = the transversal magnification factor from the disk to its conjugate plane near the quadrant photo detector

© Ecma International 2010

11

Relative intensity noise (RIN) of the laser diode -134 dB/Hz max. 10 log [(a.c. light power density / Hz) / d.c. light power ] 9.1.2

PUH for measuring unrecorded disks

The optical system for measuring the parameters is shown in Figure 3. The optical system shall be used to measure the parameters specified for the unrecorded disk and for making the recordings that are necessary for disk measurements. Different components and locations of the components are permitted, provided that the performance remains the same as the set-up in Figure 3. The optical system shall be such that the detected light reflected from the entrance surface of the disk is minimized so as not to influence the accuracy of the measurements.

H1

Radial direction Ia

+ +

H3

I1

Ib

Ic

+ +

Id

H2

Quadrant photo

+ +

Read Channel 1

+

Read Channel 2

I2

H4

Tracking Channel

Ia Ib Ic Id

detector G G

A

B

C

D

E

F

A Laser diode

F Optical disk

B Collimator lens

G Quadrant photo detector

C Polarizing beam splitter

H1, H2, H3, H4 d.c.-coupled amplifier

D Quarter-wave plate

Ia, Ib, Ic, Id Output currents from the quadrant photo detector

E Objective lens Figure 3 — Optical system of PUH for measuring unrecorded disks The combination of polarizing beam splitter C and a quarter-wave plate D shall separate the entrance optical beam from a laser diode A and the reflected optical beam from an optical disk F. The beam splitter C shall have a p-s intensity reflectance ratio of at least 100.

12

© Ecma International 2010

The focused optical beam used for writing and reading data shall have the following properties: + 10 nm

Wavelength (λ)

650 nm - 5 nm

Polarization of the light

circular

Numerical aperture

0,60 ± 0,01

Light intensity at the rim of the pupil of the objective lens

over 40 % of the maximum intensity level in the radial direction and over 50 % of the maximum intensity level in the tangential direction

Wave front aberration after passing through an ideal substrate (Thickness: 0,6 mm and index of refraction: 1,56)

0,033 λ rms max.

Normalized detector size on a disk

100 < A/(M ) < 144 μm , in which

2

2

A = the total surface area of the quadrant photo detector of the PUH and M = the transversal magnification factor from the disk to its conjugate plane near the quadrant photo detector Relative intensity noise (RIN) of the laser diode 10 log [(a.c. light power density /Hz) / d.c. light power ]

9.2

Measurement conditions

9.2.1

Recorded and unrecorded disk

- 130 dB/Hz max.

Clamping force

2,0 N ± 0,5 N

Clamping Zone

See 10.4 and Annex A.

Tapered cone angle

40,0± 0,5° see Annex E

9.2.2

Recorded disk

Scanning velocity at a Channel bit rate of 26,15625 Mbit/s

3,84 m/s ± 0,03 m/s

The measuring conditions for the recorded disk operational signals shall be as specified in Annex F. 9.2.3

Unrecorded disk

For recordings; Scanning velocity at a Channel bit rate of 52,3125 Mbit/s

7,68 m/s ± 0,03 m/s

For measurements of Servo signals and Addressing signals (see 14.4 and 14.5); Scanning velocity at a Channel bit rate of 26,15625 Mbit/s

3,84 m/s ± 0,03 m/s

The measuring conditions for the unrecorded disk operational signals shall be as specified in Annex J.

© Ecma International 2010

13

9.3

Normalized servo transfer function

In order to specify the servo system for axial and radial tracking, a function H s is used (equation I). It specifies the nominal values of the open-loop transfer function H of the Reference Servo(s) in the frequency range 23,1 Hz to 10 kHz.

2

1 ω  Hs (iω )    0   3  iω 

3iω ω0 iω 1 3ω0 1

(I)

where

=

2

0 =

20

i

=

1

0 is the 0 dB crossover frequency of the open loop transfer function. The crossover frequencies of the lead-lag network of the servo are given by lead break frequency:

1 = 0  1/3

lag break frequency:

2 = 0  3

9.4

Reference servo for axial tracking

9.4.1

Recorded disk

For an open loop transfer function H of the Reference Servo for axial tracking, 1+H is limited as schematically shown by the shaded surface of Figure 4.

14

© Ecma International 2010

Gain (dB) 86,0 66,0 62,3 44,1 40,6

8 m/s2 0

9,6 23,1

100

10 000

Frequency (Hz)

Figure 4 — Reference servo for axial tracking of recorded disk Bandwidth 100 Hz to 10 kHz  1 + H  shall be within 20 % of  1+Hs . The crossover frequency 0 = 0 / 2 shall be specified by equation (II), where max shall be 1,5 times larger than the expected maximum axial acceleration of 8 m/s 2. The tracking error emax shall not exceed 0,23 m. Thus, the crossover frequency 0 shall be f0 =

1 2π

3  αmax 1  emax 2π

3  8  1,5 0,23  10 6

= 2,0kHz

(II)

The axial tracking error emax is the peak deviation measured axially above or below the 0 level. Bandwidth 23,1 Hz to 100 Hz  1 + H  shall be within the limits defined by the following four points: 40,6 dB at 100 Hz

( 1 + Hs  - 20% at 100 Hz)

66,0 dB at 23,1 Hz

( 1 + Hs  - 20% at 23,1 Hz)

86,0 dB at 23,1 Hz

( 1 + Hs  - 20% at 23,1 Hz add 20 dB)

44,1 dB at 100 Hz

( 1 + Hs  + 20% at 100 Hz)

Bandwidth 9,6 Hz to 23,1 Hz  1 + H  shall be between 66,0 dB and 86,0 dB.

© Ecma International 2010

15

9.4.2

Unrecorded disk

For an open loop transfer function H of the Reference Servo for axial tracking,  1+H  is limited as schematically shown by the shaded surface of Figure 5. Gain (dB) 86,0 66,0 56,3 44,1 40,6

32 m/s

2

0

19,2 46,2

200

10 000

Frequency (Hz)

Figure 5 — Reference servo for axial tracking of unrecorded disk Bandwidth 200 Hz to 10 kHz  1 + H  shall be within 20 % of  1+Hs . The crossover frequency 0 = 0 / 2 shall be specified by equation (III), where max shall be 1,5 times larger than the expected maximum axial acceleration of 32 m/s2. The tracking error emax shall not exceed 0,23 m. Thus, the crossover frequency 0 shall be

f0 =

1 3  αmax 1 3  32  1,5  = 4,0kHz 2π emax 2π 0,23  10  6

(III)

The axial tracking error emax is the peak deviation measured axially above or below the 0 level. Bandwidth 46,2 Hz to 200 Hz  1 + H  shall be within the limits defined by the following four points: 40,6 dB at 200 Hz

( 1 + Hs  - 20% at 200 Hz)

66,0 dB at 46,2 Hz

( 1 + Hs  - 20% at 46,2 Hz)

86,0 dB at 46,2 Hz

( 1 + Hs  - 20% at 46,2 Hz add 20 dB)

44,1 dB at 200 Hz

( 1 + Hs  + 20% at 200 Hz)

16

© Ecma International 2010

Bandwidth 19.2 Hz to 46.2 Hz  1 + H  shall be between 66,0 dB and 86,0 dB.

9.5

Reference servo for radial tracking

9.5.1

Recorded disk

For an open-loop transfer function, H, of the Reference servo for radial tracking,  1+ H  shall be limited within the shaded area shown in Figure 6. The radial track deviation is the peak deviation measured radially inward or outward from the 0 level. Bandwidth from l00 Hz to 10k Hz  1 + H  shall be within 20 % of  1+Hs . The crossover frequency 0 = 0 / 2 shall be given by the equation (IV), where max shall be 1,5 times as 2 large as the expected radial acceleration of 1,1 m/s and emax shall not exceed 0,022 m. Thus the crossover frequency 0 shall be:

f0 

1 2π

3  αmax 1  emax 2π

3  1,1 1,5 0,022 10 6

= 2,4 kHz

(IV)

Bandwidth from 23,1 Hz to 100Hz

 1+ H  shall be within the limits enclosed by the following four points: 43,7 dB at 100 Hz

( 1 + Hs  - 20 % at 100 Hz)

69,2 dB at 23,1 Hz

( 1 + Hs  - 20 % at 23,1 Hz)

89,2 dB at 23,1 Hz

( 1 + Hs  - 20 % at 23,l Hz add 20 dB)

47,3 dB at 100 Hz

( 1 + Hs  + 20 % at 100 Hz)

Bandwidth from 9,6 Hz to 23,1 Hz

1 + H  shall be between 69,2 dB and 89,2 dB.

© Ecma International 2010

17

Gain (dB) 89,2 69,2 64,0 47,3 43,7

1,1 m/s2 0

9,6 23,1

100

10 000

Frequency (Hz)

Figure 6 — Reference servo for radial tracking of recorded disk 9.5.2

Unrecorded disk

For an open-loop transfer function, H, of the Reference servo for radial tracking,  1+ H  shall be limited within the shaded area shown in Figure 7. The radial track deviation is the peak deviation measured radially inward or outward from the 0 level. Bandwidth from 200 Hz to 10 kHz  1 + H  shall be within 20 % of  1+Hs . The crossover frequency 0 = 0 / 2 shall be given by the equation (V), where max shall be 1,5 times as 2 large as the expected radial acceleration of 4,4 m/s and emax shall not exceed 0,022 m. Thus the crossover frequency 0 shall be:

f0 

1 3  αmax 1 3  4,4  1,5  = 4,8 kHz 2π emax 2π 0,022 10 6

(V)

Bandwidth from 46,2 Hz to 200Hz

 1+ H  shall be within the limits enclosed by the following four points: 43,7 dB at 200 Hz

( 1 + Hs  - 20 % at 200 Hz)

69,2 dB at 46,2 Hz

( 1 + Hs  - 20 % at 46,2 Hz)

89,2 dB at 46,2 Hz

( 1 + Hs  - 20 % at 46,2 Hz add 20 dB)

47,3 dB at 200 Hz

( 1 + Hs  + 20 % at 200 Hz)

18

© Ecma International 2010

Bandwidth from 19,2 Hz to 46,2 Hz

1 + H  shall be between 69,2 dB and 89,2 dB. Gain (dB) 89,2 69,2 62,7 59,2 47,3 43,7

4,4 m/s

2

0

19,2

46,2

200

10 000

Frequency (Hz)

Figure 7 — Reference servo for radial tracking of recorded disk

© Ecma International 2010

19

Section 2 — Dimensional, mechanical and physical characteristics of the disk 10 Dimensional characteristics Dimensional characteristics are specified for those parameters deemed mandatory for interchange and compatible use of the disk. Where there is freedom of design, only the functional characteristics of the elements described are indicated. Figures 8, 9 and 10 show the dimensional requirements in summarized form. The different parts of the disk are described from the centre hole to the outside rim. The dimensions are referred to two Reference Planes P and Q. Reference Plane P is the primary Reference Plane. It is the plane on which the bottom surface of the Clamping Zone (see 10.4) rests. Reference Plane Q is the plane parallel to Reference Plane P at the height of the top surface of the Clamping Zone. d1 h1

Q

A

h2

e2

d2

e1

h4

P

h3

d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10

Figure 8 — Areas of the disk

20

© Ecma International 2010

h5

Q

h7

e3 h6

e1 max

h8

P d11 d1

Figure 9 — Rim area

d2

d2 15,00 mm min.

97-0001-A

Figure 10 — Hole of the assembled disk

10.1 Overall dimensions The 120 mm disk shall have an overall diameter d1 = 120,00 mm  0,30 mm The 80 mm disk shall have an overall diameter d1 = 80,00 mm  0,30 mm The centre hole of a substrate or a dummy substrate shall have a diameter + 0,15 mm

d2 = 15,00 mm - 0,00 mm

The diameter of the hole of an assembled disk, i.e. with both parts bonded together, shall be 15,00 mm min. See Figure 10. There shall be no burr on both edges of the centre hole. The edge of the centre hole shall be rounded off or chamfered. The rounded radius shall be 0,1 mm max. The chamfer shall extend over a height of 0,1 mm max.

© Ecma International 2010

21

The thickness of the disk, including adhesive layer and label(s), shall be + 0,30 mm

e1 = 1,20 mm - 0,06 mm

See Figure 8.

10.2 First transition area In the area defined by diameter d2 and d3 = 16,0 mm min. the surface of the disk is permitted to be above the Reference Plane P and/or below Reference Plane Q by 0,10 mm max. See Figure 8.

10.3 Second transition area This area shall extend between diameter d3 and diameter d4 = 22,0 mm max. In this area the disk may have an uneven surface of burrs up to 0,05 mm max. beyond Reference Planes P and/or Q. See Figure 8.

10.4 Clamping Zone This zone shall extend between diameter d4 and diameter d5 = 33,0 mm min. Each side of the Clamping Zone shall be flat within 0,1 mm. The top side of the Clamping Zone, i.e. that of Reference Plane Q shall be parallel to the bottom side, i.e. Reference Plane P within 0,1 mm. In the Clamping Zone the thickness e2 of the disk shall be + 0,20 mm

e2 = 1,20 mm - 0,10 mm

See Figure 8.

10.5 Third transition area This area shall extend between diameter d5 and diameter d6 = 40,0 mm max. for the 120 mm diameter disk or d6 = 37,0 mm max. for the 80 mm diameter disk. In this area the top surface is permitted to be above the Reference Plane Q by h1 = 0,25 mm max.

22

© Ecma International 2010

or below Reference Plane Q by h2 = 0,10 mm max. The bottom surface is permitted to be above Reference Plane P by h3 = 0,10 mm max. or below Reference Plane P by h4 = 0,25 mm max. See Figure 8.

10.6 R-Information Zone The R-Information Zone on Layer 0 shall extend from d7 = 44,00 mm min. which is the beginning of the Inner Disk Testing Area to the beginning of the Lead-in Zone as specified in Clause 28. The R-Information Zone on Layer 1 shall extend from d7 = 44,00 mm min. which is the beginning of the Inner Disk Testing Area to the end of the Lead-out Zone, as specified in Clause 28. In the R-Information Zone the thickness of the disk shall be equal to e1 specified in 10.1. See Figure 8. 10.6.1 Sub-divisions of the R-Information Zone The main parts of the R-Information Zone are 

the Inner Disk Testing Areas (IDTA)

the Recording Management Areas (RMA)

10.7 Information Zone The Information Zone on Layer 0 shall extend from the beginning of the Lead-in Zone to diameter d10 the value of which is specified in Table 1. The Information Zone on Layer 1 shall extend from the end of the Lead-out Zone to diameter d10 the value of which is specified in Table 1. In the Information Zone the thickness of the disk shall be equal to e1 specified in 10.1. See Figure 8. 10.7.1 Sub-divisions of the Information zone The main parts of the Information Zone are    

the Lead-in Zone the Data Zones the Middle Zones the Lead-out Zone

© Ecma International 2010

23

10.7.1.1

Lead-in Zone

The Lead-in Zone shall extend on Layer 0 between the outer diameter of the R-Information Zone as specified in 26.3 and diameter d8. See Figure 8. 10.7.1.2

Data Zone

The Data Zone on Layer 0 shall start at + 0,0 mm

d8 = 48,0 mm - 0,08 mm

and shall end at d9 = 116,2 mm max. for the 120 mm diameter disk or d9 = 76,2 mm max. for the 80 mm diameter disk. See Figure 8. The Data Zone on Layer 1 shall start at d8' = d8 + 0.13 mm min. and shall end at - 0,13 mm

d9' = d9 - 0,29 mm .

10.7.1.3

Middle Zone

The Middle Zone on Layer 0 shall extend from diameter d9 to diameter d10. The Middle Zone on Layer 1 shall extend from diameter d9' to diameter d10. The value of d10 depends on the length of the Data Zone as shown in Table 1. See Figure 8. 10.7.1.4

Lead-out Zone

The Lead-out Zone shall extend on Layer 1 between the outer diameter of the R-Information Zone as specified in 26.3 and diameter d8.

24

© Ecma International 2010

Table 1 — End of the Information Zone Outer diameter d9 of the Data Zone

Value of diameter d10 + 1,0 mm

Less than 69,2 mm

70,0 mm

120 mm disk

min. + 0,0 mm

69,2 mm to 116,2 mm

d9 + 0,8 mm min. + 1,0 mm

Less than 69,2 mm 80 mm disk

70,0 mm

min. + 0,0 mm

69,2 mm to 76,2 mm

d9 + 0,8 mm min.

10.8 Track geometry In the R-Information Zone and Information Zone tracks are constituted by a 360 turn of a spiral. The track pitch averaged over the data zone shall be 0,74 μm  0,01 μm. The maximum deviation of the track pitch from 0,74 μm shall be  0,03 μm. 10.8.1 Track Path In this standard, only the Opposite Track Path (OTP) is specified. Tracks are read starting on Layer 0 at the inner side towards outer side, continuing on Layer 1 from the outer side towards inner side of a disk as shown in Figure 11. The spiral direction of Layer 1 is reversed from that of Layer 0. Opposite Track Path Spiral direction Layer 1 Layer 0 Spiral direction Read-out surface Radius

: Data Zone

Layer 1 : The layer farthest from the read-out surface

: Lead-in Zone : Lead-out Zone

Layer 0 : The layer nearest to the read-out surface

: Middle Zone

Figure 11 — Track Path

© Ecma International 2010

25

10.9 Channel bit length The R-Information Zone and Information Zone shall be recorded in CLV mode. The Channel bit length averaged over the Data Zone shall be 146,7 nm  1,5 nm.

10.10 Rim area The rim area shall be that area extending from diameter d11 = 118,0 mm min. for the 120 mm disk or d11 = 78,0 mm min. for the 80 mm disk to diameter d1. In this area the top surface is permitted to be above Reference Plane Q by h5 = 0,1 mm max. and the bottom surface is permitted to be below Reference Plane P by h6 = 0,1 mm max. The total thickness of this area shall not be greater than 1,50 mm, i.e. the maximum value of e1. The thickness of the rim proper shall be e3 = 0,6 mm min. The outer edges of the disk shall be either rounded off with a rounding radius of 0,2 mm max. or be chamfered over h7 = 0,2 mm max. h8 = 0,2 mm max. See Figure 9.

10.11 Remark on tolerances All heights specified in the preceding Clauses and indicated by hi are independent from each other. This means that, for example, if the top surface of the third transition area is below Reference Plane Q by up to h2, there is no implication that the bottom surface of this area has to be above Reference Plane P by up to h3. Where dimensions have the same - generally maximum - numerical value, this does not imply that the actual values have to be identical.

10.12 Label The label shall be placed on the side of the disk opposite the entrance surface for the information to which the label is related. The label shall be placed either on an outer surface of the disk or inside the disk bonding plane. In the former case, the label shall not extend over the Clamping Zone. In the latter case, the label may extend over the Clamping Zone. In both cases, the label shall not extend over the rim of the centre hole nor over the outer edge of the disk. The label should not affect the performance of the disk. Labels shall not be attached to either of the read out surfaces of a double sided disk.

26

© Ecma International 2010

11 Mechanical parameters 11.1 Mass The mass of the 120 mm disk shall be in the range 13 g to 20 g. The mass of the 80 mm disk shall be in the range 6 g to 9 g.

11.2 Moment of inertia The moment of inertia of the 120 mm disk, relative to its rotation axis, shall not exceed 0,040 gm . 2

The moment of inertia of the 80 mm disk, relative to its rotation axis, shall not exceed 0,010 g m . 2

11.3 Dynamic imbalance The dynamic imbalance of the 120 mm disk, relative to its rotation axis, shall not exceed 0,0025 gm. The dynamic imbalance of the 80 mm disk, relative to its rotation axis, shall not exceed 0,0010 gm.

11.4 Sense of rotation The sense of rotation of the disk shall be counter clockwise as seen by the optical system.

11.5 Runout 11.5.1 Axial runout When measured by the PUH with the Reference Servo for axial tracking, the disk rotating at the scanning velocity, the deviation of the recorded layer from its nominal position in the direction normal to the Reference Planes shall not exceed 0,3 mm for the 120 mm disk and 0,2 mm for the 80 mm disk. The residual tracking error below 10 kHz, measured using the Reference Servo for axial tracking, shall be less than 0,23 μm. The measuring filter shall be a Butterworth LPF, ƒc (-3dB): 10 kHz, slope: -80 dB/decade. 11.5.2 Radial runout The runout of the outer edge of the disk shall be less than 0,30 mm, peak-to-peak. The radial runout of tracks at the rotational frequency determined by the scanning velocity shall be less than 40 μm and 60 μm peak-to-peak, for Layer 0 and Layer 1 respectively. The residual tracking error below 1,1 kHz, measured using the Reference Servo for radial tracking, shall be less than 0,022 μm. The measuring filter shall be a Butterworth LPF, ƒc (-3dB): 1,1 kHz, slope: -80 dB/decade. The rms noise value of the residual error signal in the frequency band from 1,1 kHz to 10 kHz, measured with an integration time of 20 ms, using the Reference Servo for radial tracking, shall be less than 0,016μm. The measuring filter shall be a Butterworth BPF, frequency range (-3dB): 1,1 kHz, slope: +80 dB/decade to 10 kHz, slope: - 80 dB/decade.

© Ecma International 2010

27

12 Optical parameters 12.1 Recorded and unrecorded disk parameters 12.1.1 Index of refraction The index of refraction RI of the substrate shall be 1,55 ± 0,10. The index of refraction of the space layer shall be 1,49 min. and (RI ± 0,10). 12.1.2 Thickness of the transparent substrate The thickness of the substrate or the thickness of the substrate including the space layer shall be determined by its index of refraction as specified in Figure 12. + 15 μm

The thickness of the space layer shall be: 55 μm - 15 μm

The variation of the space layer thickness shall be ± 10 μm max. within a disk, and ± 4 μm max. within one revolution of a disk.

0.66 ( 1.45 , 0.643 )

( 1.56 , 0.630 )

0.64 ( 1.65 , 0.630 )

Maximum thickness of the substrate,

Thickness ( mm )

0.62

0.60

0.58

0.56 ( 1.45 , 0.573 )

( 1.65 , 0.560 )

( 1.56 , 0.560 )

Including the Space layer

Layer 1

Layer 0

Min. thickness of the substrate

0 1.40

1.50

1.60

1.70

Refractive Index Figure 12 — Substrate thickness as a function of the index of refraction

28

© Ecma International 2010

12.1.3 Angular deviation The angular deviation is the angle αbetween a parallel incident beam and the reflected beam. The incident beam shall have a diameter in the range 0,3 mm to 3,0 mm. This angle includes deflection due to the entrance surface and to unparallelism of the recorded layer, see Annex A, Figure A.1. It shall meet the following requirements when measured according to Annex A: In radial direction:

α = 0,80° max.

In tangential direction:

α = 0,30° max.

12.1.4 Birefringence of the transparent substrate The birefringence of the transparent substrate shall be 100 nm max. when measured according to Annex B.

12.2 Recorded disk reflectivity When measured according to Annex D, the reflectivity of the recorded layer(s) shall be 16 % to 27 % (PUH with PBS).

12.3 Unrecorded disk parameters 12.3.1 Polarity of reflectivity modulation The reflectivity is high in unrecorded areas and changes to low in the recorded marks. 12.3.2 Recording power sensitivity variation The variation in optimum recording power over the surface of the disk shall be less than  0,05 Po. See Annex H.

© Ecma International 2010

29

Section 3 — Operational signals 13 Operational signals for recorded disk 13.1 Measurement conditions The operational signals shall be measured after recording 8/16 modulated data in more than 5 tracks. The Pick-Up Head (PUH) shall be as specified in 9.1.1. The measurement conditions shall be as specified in 9.2.1 and 9.2.2. The HF signal equalizing for jitter measurement shall be as specified in Annex F. The normalized servo transfer function shall be as specified in 9.3. The reference servo for axial tracking shall be as specified in 9.4. The reference servo for radial tracking shall be as specified in 9.5.

13.2 Read conditions The power of the read spot shall not exceed 1,0 mW (continuous wave).

13.3 Recorded disk high frequency (HF) signals The HF signal is obtained by summing the currents of the four elements of the quadrant photo detector. These currents are modulated by diffraction and reflectivity changes of the light beam at the recorded marks representing the information on the recorded layer. Recording power conditions are specified in Annex H. All measurements, except jitter are executed on the HF signal before equalizing. 13.3.1 Modulated amplitude The peak-to-peak value generated by the longest recorded mark and space is I14. The peak value corresponding to the HF signal before high-pass filtering is I14H. The peak-to-peak value generated by the shortest recorded mark and space is I3. The zero level is the signal level obtained when no disk is inserted. These parameters shall satisfy the following requirements: I14 / I14H = 0,60 min. I3 / I14 = 0,20 min. The maximum value of ( I14H max. - I14H min. ) / I14H max. shall be as specified in Table 2. See Figure 13.

30

© Ecma International 2010

Table 2 — Maximum value of ( I14H max. - I14H min.) / I14H max. Over each layer

Over one revolution

PUH with PBS

0,33

0,15

PUH without PBS

0,20

0,10

13.3.2 Signal asymmetry The value of asymmetry shall satisfy the following requirements when a disk is recorded at the optimum recording power Po. See Figure 13: - 0,05   (I14H + I14L ) / 2 - (I3H + I3L ) / 2  / I14  0,15 where (I14H + I14L) / 2 is the centre level of I14 (I3H + I3L) / 2 is the centre level of I3. 13.3.3 Cross-track signal The cross-track signal is derived from the HF signal when low pass filtered with a cut off frequency of 30 kHz when the light beam crosses the tracks. See Figure 14. The low pass filter is a 1st-order filter. The cross-track signal shall meet the following requirements: IT = IH - IL IT/IH = 0,10 min. where IH is the peak value of this signal and IT is the peak-to-peak value.

13.4 Quality of signals 13.4.1 Jitter Jitter is the standard deviation  of the time variation of the digitized data passed through the equalizer. The jitter of the leading and the trailing edges is measured relative to the clock of the phase-lock loop and normalized by the Channel bit clock interval. Jitter shall be less than 8,0 % of the Channel bit clock period, when measured according to Annex F. 13.4.2 Random errors A row of an ECC Block (see Clause 19) that has at least 1 byte in error constitutes a PI error. In any 8 consecutive ECC Blocks the total number of PI errors before correction shall not exceed 280. 13.4.3 Defects The diameter of local defects shall meet the following requirements:  for air bubbles it shall not exceed 100 µm,  for black spots causing birefringence it shall not exceed 200 µm,  for black spots not causing birefringence it shall not exceed 300 µm.

© Ecma International 2010

31

In addition, over a distance of 80 mm in scanning direction of tracks, the following requirements shall be met:  the total length of defects larger than 30 µm shall not exceed 300 µm,  there shall be at most 6 such defects.

13.5 Servo signals The output currents of the four quadrants of the quadrant photo detector shown in Figure 15 are identified by Ia, Ib, Ic and Id. 13.5.1 Differential phase tracking error signal The differential phase tracking error signal shall be derived from the phase difference between diagonal pairs of detectors elements when the light beam crosses the tracks: Phase (Ia + Ic) - Phase (Ib + Id) , see Figure 16. The differential phase tracking error signal shall be low-pass filtered with a cut-off frequency of 30 kHz, see Annex C. This signal shall meet the following requirements, see Figure 16: Amplitude At the positive 0 crossing t /T shall be in the range 0,5 to 1,1 at 0,10 m radial offset, where t is the average time difference derived from the phase difference between diagonal pairs of detector elements, and T is the Channel bit clock period. Asymmetry The asymmetry shall meet the following requirement, see Figure 16:

T1  T2 T1  T2

 0,2

where  T1 is the positive peak value of t / T,  T2 is the negative peak value of t / T. 13.5.2 Tangential push-pull signal This signal shall be derived from the instantaneous level of the differential output (Ia + Id) - (Ib + Ic ). It shall meet the following requirement, see Figure 17:

0

32

Ia  Id   Ib  Ic pp I14

 0,9

© Ecma International 2010

I14

I3

I14H I3H I3L

I14L

0 Level 97-0002-A

Figure 13 — Modulated amplitude

IT IH IL 0 Level

Figure 14 — Cross-track signal

Ia

Ib

Light beam Tangential direction

Ic

Id

97-0047-A

Figure 15 — Quadrant photo detector

T1 t T

0 Level

-Tp

0

Tp T2

Radial spot displacement Tp : Track pitch Figure 16 — Differential phase tracking error signal

© Ecma International 2010

33

Recorded mark

(Ia+Id)-(Ib+Ic) pp

Figure 17 — Tangential push-pull signal

13.6 Groove wobble signal The output current of each quadrant photo detector element of the PUH are Ia, Ib, Ic and Id, see Figure 15. The groove wobble signal is derived from the differential output when the light beam is following a track, and is [(Ia + Ib) - (Ic + Id)]. The groove wobble signal shall meet the following requirements. The locking frequency for the groove wobble shall be 8 times the SYNC Frame frequency. CNR of the groove wobble signal shall be greater than 31 dB (RBW = 1 kHz). The CNR of the groove wobble signal shall be measured for the average value using a spectrum analyser where the Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) setting is 1 kHz, see Figure 18.

Carrier level

Noise level

Figure 18 — Measurement of the wobble CNR

34

© Ecma International 2010

14 Operational signals for the unrecorded disk 14.1 Measurement conditions  The drive optical Pick-Up Head (PUH) for measurement of the unrecorded disk parameters and for making the recordings necessary for disk measurements shall be as specified in 9.1.2.  The measurement conditions shall be as specified in 9.2.1 and 9.2.3.  The normalized servo transfer function shall be as specified in 9.3.  The reference servo for axial tracking shall be as specified in 9.4.  The reference servo for radial tracking shall be as specified in 9.5.

14.2 Recording conditions     

General recording strategy Optimum recording power Optimum recording power range of all disks Bias power Recording power window

: In groove : Determined by OPC specified in Annex H : 10,0 mW  Po  32,0 mW : Pb  0,7 mW : Po  0,25 mW

14.3 Write strategy for media testing During the recordings necessary for disk measurements using the PUH specified in 9.1.2, the laser power shall be modulated according to the basic write strategy, see Figure 19. Each write pulse of length 5T to 11T and 14T consists of two parts; a top pulse and last pulse with T representing the length of one clock period. The top pulse and the last pulse are linked together by the middle power (Pm). The 3T and 4T marks are recorded using the top pulse only. This write pulse modulation method is referred as write strategy with Non-multi-pulse. The top pulse for a 3T and 4T mark is generated by starting its leading edge a short time after the leading edge of the recording data, the trailing edge of the top pulse is ended at the trailing edge of the recording data. The trailing edge of the top pulse can be shifted and each shift (3Tdtop, 4Tdtop) and the top pulse width (3Ttop, 4Ttop) shall be given in the Write Strategy code, see 25.1.6.1. Each top pulse width shall be kept regardless of the trailing edge shift. The write pulse of length 5T to 11T and 14T is generated by starting the leading edge of the top pulse a short time after the leading edge of the recording data, the trailing edge of the last pulse is ended at the trailing edge of the recording data. The write pulse width (nTwt), the top pulse width (nTtop) and the last pulse width (nTlp) shall be given in the Write Strategy code, see 25.1.6.1. The off pulse (Toff) is generated by starting at the trailing edge of the write pulses of all marks to be recorded. The length of the off pulse shall be given in the Write Strategy code, see 25.1.6.1. According to the adaptive write pulse modulation as shown in Figure 19, the leading and trailing edges of the top pulse and the last pulse can be shifted along the time axis independently. The shift of the leading edge (Tld, Tld2) and of the trailing edge (T tr, Ttr2) shall be selected according to the preceding space length (Tsp) and the recording data length (T wd). Each pulse width is changed when each edge is shifted. The detailed parameters for the adaptive write pulse modulation shall be given in the Write Strategy code, see 25.1.6.1. The recording power ratio of the optimum recording power and the optimum middle power (Po/Pm) is given in the Write Strategy code, see 25.1.6.1.

© Ecma International 2010

35

Figure 19 — Write pulse modulation 14.3.1 Definition of the write pulse The write pulse from the objective lens shall be as shown in Figure 20. The rise times (Tr) and fall times (Tf) shall not exceed 2 ns. Twt : (over 5T)

0.9 Po

Tlp

Pm

Pb

0.5Po

Tf

0.1 Po

0.1 (Po-Pb)

Tr 0.5 (Po-Pb)

0.9 (Po-Pb)

Po

Ttop

0.5 (Po+Pm)

Ttop : (3T&4T)

Zero level

Figure 20 — Write pulse

36

© Ecma International 2010

14.4 Servo signals The output currents of the four quadrants of the quadrant photo detector are Ia, Ib, Ic, and Id, see Figure 21. The photo detector elements (Ia and Ib) are located at a greater radius than elements (Ic and Id). 14.4.1 Radial push-pull tracking error signal The radial push-pull tracking error signal is derived from the differential output of the detector elements when the light beam crosses the tracks and shall be [(Ia + Ib) - (Ic + Id)]. The radial push-pull tracking error signal shall be measured with the PUH specified in 9.1.2 before and after recording and is low pass filtered with a cut-off frequency 30 kHz. The radial push-pull amplitude before recording (PPb) and after recording (PPa) shown in Figure 21 are defined as: PPb, PPa = ( Ia + Ib) - (Ic + Id)a.c. / ( Ia + Ib + Ic + Id)d.c. ( Ia + Ib + Ic + Id)d.c shall be measured from zero level to the average level of ( Ia + Ib + Ic + Id)a.c (see Figure 22). The radial push-pull ratio (PPr) is defined as: PPr = PPb / PPa. The above parameters shall meet the following requirements:  PPb signal amplitude :  Push Pull ratio :  Variation in PPb signal :

0,22 < PPb < 0,44 0,5 < PPr < 1,0 PPb < 15 %

where PPb = [(PPb) max. - (PPb) min.] / [(PPb) max. + (PPb) min.]  PPb shall be measured over the entire disk surface (from 22,0 to 58,6 mm for 120 mm disk and to 38,6 mm for 80 mm disk).

Ia

Ib

Id

Ic

Light beam Tangential direction

Figure 21 — Quadrant photo detector

© Ecma International 2010

37

(Ia+Ib+Ic+Id)a.c.

(Ia+Ib+Ic+Id)d.c. Groove

|(Ia+Ib)-(Ic+Id)|a.c. Centre hole

Differential signal

|(Ia+Ib)-(Ic+Id)|a.c.

02-0001-A

Figure 22 — Radial push-pull tracking error signal 14.4.2 Defects The requirements shall be as specified in 13.4.3.

14.5 Addressing signals The output currents of the four quadrants of the split photo detector are Ia, Ib, Ic and Id as shown in Figure 21. 14.5.1 Land Pre-Pit signal The Land Pre-Pit signal is derived from the instantaneous level of the differential output when the light beam is following a track and shall be [(Ia + Ib) - (Ic + Id)]. This differential signal shall be measured by the PUH specified in 9.1.2 before and after recording. The Land Pre-Pit signal amplitude before recording (LPPb) shall be defined as: LPPb = ( Ia + Ib) - (Ic + Id)o-p / ( Ia + Ib + Ic + Id)d.c. See Figure 22 and 23. (Ia + Ib) - (Ic + Id)o-p shall be measured at the average point of maximum and minimum signals and the bandwidth of the photo-detector amplifiers shall be higher than 20 MHz.

38

© Ecma International 2010

( Ia + Ib + Ic + Id)d.c. shall be measured when the light beam is following a track and shall be low pass filtered with a cut-off frequency of 30 kHz. The aperture ratio of the Land Pre-Pit after recording (AR) shall be defined as: AR=APmin. / APmax. APmin. and APmax. are the minimum and the maximum values of the Land Pre-Pit signal amplitude AP = ( Ia + Ib) - (Ic + Id) without the wobble amplitude. See Figure 23 and Annex M. The above parameters shall meet the following requirements:    

Signal amplitude before recording: 0,18 < LPPb < 0,28 Aperture ratio after recording: AR > 12 % AR > 10 %, when 0,23 < LPPb < 0,28 Block error ratio before recording: BLERb < 3 % Block error ratio after recording: BLERa < 5 %

The Half Maximum Full Width of LPPb signal shall be larger than 1T. The Land Pre-Pit on the outer side of the track shall be detected when the laser beam is following the track. For the measurement of the Block error ratio of the Land Pre-Pit data, the parity A errors before error correction shall be measured over 1000 ECC Blocks.

|(Ia+Ib)-(Ic+Id)|0-p

(a) Before recording for measuring LPPb AP min

AP max

(b) After recording for measuring AR

Figure 23 — Land Pre-Pit signal

© Ecma International 2010

39

14.5.2 Groove wobble signal The groove wobble signal is derived from the differential output when the light beam is following a track, and is [(Ia + Ib) - (Ic+ Id)]. The groove wobble signal shall be measured by the PUH specified in 9.1.2 before and after recording. The groove wobble signal amplitudes before recording (WOb) and after recording (WOa) are defined as: WOb, WOa = [(Ia + Ib) - (Ic + Id)] p-p The above parameters shall meet the following requirements: The locking frequency for the groove wobble shall be 8 times the SYNC Frame frequency. See Clause 21. CNR of WOb shall be greater than 35 dB (RBW = 1 kHz) CNR of WOa shall be greater than 31 dB (RBW = 1 kHz) The CNR of WOb and WOa shall be measured for the average value using a spectrum analyser where the Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) setting is 1 kHz, see Figure 24.

Carrier level

Noise level

Figure 24 — Measurement of the wobble CNR The normalized Wobble signal (NWO) is defined to derive the wobble amplitude in nanometres. NWO = WOb / RPS and its value shall be 0,06 < NWO < 0,12 where RPS is the peak to peak value of the radial push-pull signal [(Ia + Ib) - (Ic + Id)] before recording, when the light spot crosses the tracks and is low pass filtered with a cut-off frequency 30 kHz. 14.5.3 Relation in phase between wobble and Land Pre-Pit The groove wobble signal and Land Pre-Pit signal are derived from the differential output currents [(Ia + Ib) (Ic+ Id)]. Therefore, when the photo detector elements (Ia, Ib) are located at the outer side of the disk and groove wobble is regarded as a sine wave, the relation in phase between groove wobble and Land Pre-Pit (PWP) shall meet the following requirement: PWP = -90 ± 10°. The PWP value shall be measured as the phase difference between the largest amplitude point of the LPP signal and the averaged zero crossing point of the wobble, see Figure 25. The PWP value shall be measured before recording.

40

© Ecma International 2010

Zero crossing

WOb

PWP

Figure 25 — Relation in phase between wobble and Land Pre-Pit

© Ecma International 2010

41

Section 4 — Data format 15 General The data received from the host, called Main Data, is formatted in a number of steps before being recorded on the disk. It is transformed successively into:     

a Data Frame, a Scrambled Frame, an ECC Block, a Recording Frame, a Physical Sector.

These steps are specified in the following Clauses.

16 Data Frames A Data Frame shall consist of 2 064 bytes arranged in an array of 12 rows each containing 172 bytes, see Figure 26. The first row shall start with three fields, called Identification Data (ID), the check bytes of ID Error Detection Code (IED), and RSV, followed by 160 Main Data bytes. The next 10 rows shall each contain 172 Main Data bytes and the last row shall contain 168 Main Data bytes followed by four check bytes of Error Detection Code (EDC). The 2 048 Main Data bytes are identified as D 0 to D2 047.

172 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes ID

IED

6 bytes RSV

Main Data 160 bytes ( D0 to D159 ) Main Data 172 bytes ( D160 to D331 ) Main Data 172 bytes ( D172 to D503 )

12 rows

Main Data 172 bytes (D1 078 to D1 879) Main Data 168 bytes (D1 880 to D2 047)

EDC 4 bytes

Figure 26 — Data Frame

42

© Ecma International 2010

16.1 Identification Data (ID) This field shall consist of four bytes. Within these bytes the bits shall be numbered consecutively from b 0 (lsb) to b31 (msb), see Figure 27. b31

b24 b23

b0

Sector Information

Sector Number Figure 27 — Identification Data (ID)

b31 Sector Format type

b30 Tracking method

b29 Reflectivity

b28 Reserved

b27 and b26 Zone type

b25 Data type

b24 Layer number

Figure 28 — Sector Information of the Identification Data (ID)

The least significant three bytes, bits b0 to b23, shall specify the sector number in binary notation. The sector number of the first sector of an ECC Block of 16 sectors shall be a multiple of 16. The bits of the most significant byte shown in Figure 28, the Sector Information, shall be set as follows: a)

Sector format type

bit b31

shall be set to ZERO, indicating the CLV format type specified for Read-only disk and Recordable disk.

b)

Tracking method

bit b30

shall be set to ZERO, indicating Differential Phase tracking.

c)

Reflectivity

bit b29

shall be set to ONE, indicating the reflectivity is less than or equal to 40 %, measured with PBS PUH.

d)

Reserved

bit b28

shall be set to ZERO.

e)

Zone type

bit b27 and bit b26

shall be set to ZERO ZERO in the Data Zone. shall be set to ZERO ONE in the Lead-in Zone. shall be set to ONE ZERO in the Lead-out Zone. shall be set to ONE ONE in the Middle Zone.

f)

Data type

bit b25

shall be set to ZERO, indicating Read-Only data shall be set to ONE, indicating Linking data (see Clause 23).

g)

Layer number

bit b24

shall be set to ZERO, indicating Layer 0. shall be set to ONE, indicating Layer 1.

Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard.

16.2 ID Error Detection Code When identifying all bytes of the array shown in Figure 23 as Ci,j for i = 0 to 11 and j = 0 to 171, the check bytes for ID Error Detection code (IED) are represented by C0,j for j = 4 to 5. Their setting shall be obtained as follows:

© Ecma International 2010

43

5

IED(x)   C0, j x5 j  I(x) x 2 mod GE ( x) j 4

where 3

I(x) =  C0,j x3-j j=0 1

GE(x) =  ( x + k ) k=0

 represents the primitive root of the primitive polynomial P(x) = x 8 + x 4 + x 3 + x 2 + 1

16.3 RSV This field shall consist of 6 bytes. Their setting is application dependent, for instance a video application. If this setting is not specified by the application, the default setting shall be all ZEROs.

16.4 Error Detection Code This field shall contain four check bytes of Error Detection Code (EDC) computed over the preceding 2 060 bytes of the Data Frame. Considering the Data Frame as a single bit field starting with the most significant bit of the first byte of the ID field and ending with the least significant bit of the EDC field, then this msb will be b16 511 and the lsb will be b0. Each bit bi of the EDC shall be as follows for i = 31 to 0: 0

EDC(x) =  bi xi = I(x) mod G(x) i=31

where: 32

I(x) =  bi xi i=16 511

G(x) = x32 + x31 + x4 + 1.

17 Scrambled Frames The 2 048 Main Data bytes shall be scrambled by means of the circuit shown in Figure 29 which shall consist of a feedback bit shift register in which bits r7 (msb) to r0 (lsb) represent a scrambling byte at each 8-bit shift. At the beginning of the scrambling procedure of a Data Frame, positions r 14 to r0 shall be pre-set to the value(s) specified in Table 3. The same pre-set value shall be used for 16 consecutive Data Frames. After 16 groups of 16 Data Frames, the sequence is repeated. The initial pre-set number is equal to the value represented by bits b7 (msb) to bit b4 (lsb) of the ID field of the Data Frame. Table 3 specifies the initial pre-set value of the shift register corresponding to the 16 initial pre-set numbers.

44

© Ecma International 2010

Table 3 — Initial value of shift register Initial pre-set number (0) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Initial pre-set number (8) (9) (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)

Initial value (0001) (5500) (0002) (2A00) (0004) (5400) (0008) (2800)

Initial value (0010) (5000) (0020) (2001) (0040) (4002) (0080) (0005)

+

r14

r13

r12

r11

r10

r9

r8

r7

r6

r5

r4

r3

r2

r1

r0

Figure 29 — Feedback shift register for generating scramble data The part of the initial value of r7 to r0 is taken out as scrambling byte S0. After that, 8-bit shift is repeated 2 047 times and the following 2 047 bytes shall be taken from r 7 to r0 as scrambling bytes S1 to S2047. The Main Data bytes Dk of the Data Frame become scrambled bytes D’k where D’k = Dk  Sk for k = 0 to 2 047  stands for Exclusive OR.

18 ECC Block configuration An ECC Block is formed by arranging 16 consecutive Scrambled Frames in an array of 192 rows of 172 bytes each, see Figure 30. To each of the 172 columns, 16 bytes of Parity of Outer Code are added, then, to each of the resulting 208 rows, 10 bytes of Parity of Inner Code are added. Thus a complete ECC Block comprises 208 rows of 182 bytes each. The bytes of this array are identified as B i,j as follows, where i is the row number and j the column number. Bi,j for i = 0 to 191 and j = 0 to 171 are bytes from the Scrambled Frames Bi,j for i = 192 to 207 and j = 0 to 171 are bytes of the Parity of Outer Code Bi,j for i = 0 to 207 and j = 172 to 181 are bytes of the Parity of Inner Code

© Ecma International 2010

45

PI 10 bytes

172 bytes

B0,0

B0,1

B0,170

B0,171

B0,172

B0,181

B1,0

B1,1

B1,170

B1,171

B1,172

B1,181

B2,0

B2,1

B2,170

B2,171

B2,172

B2,181

B189,0

B189,1

B189,170 B189,171 B189,172

B189,181

B190,0

B190,1

B190,170 B190,171 B190,172

B190,181

B191,0

B191,1

B191,170 B191,171 B191,172

B191,181

B192,0

B192,1

B192,170 B192,171 B192,172

B192,181

B207,0

B207,1

B207,170 B207,171 B207,172

B207,181

192 rows

PO 16 rows

Figure 30 — ECC Block The PO and PI bytes shall be obtained as follows : In each of columns j = 0 to 171, the 16 PO bytes are defined by the remainder polynomial R j(x) to form the outer code RS (208,192,17). 207

Rj(x) =  Bi,j x207-i = Ij(x) x16 mod GPO(x) i=192

where: 191

Ij(x) =  Bi,j x191-i i=0 15

GPO(x) =  (x + k ) k=0

In each of rows i = 0 to 207, the 10 PI bytes are defined by the remainder polynomial Ri(x) to form the inner code RS (182,172,11). 181

Ri(x) =  Bi,j x181-j

= Ii(x) x10 mod GPI(x)

j=172

where: 171

Ii(x) =  Bi,j x171-j j=0

46

© Ecma International 2010

9

GPI(x) =  (x + k ) k=0

 is the primitive root of the primitive polynomial P(x) = x8 + x4 + x3 + x2 + 1.

19 Recording Frames Sixteen Recording Frames shall be obtained by interleaving one of the 16 PO rows at a time after every 12 rows of an ECC Block, see Figure 31. This is achieved by re-locating the bytes Bi,j of the ECC Block as Bm,n for m = i + int i / 12 and n = j for i  191 m = 13 (i - 191) - 1 and n = j for i  192 where int x represents the largest integer not greater than x. Thus the 37 856 bytes of an ECC Block are re-arranged into 16 Recording Frames of 2 366 bytes. Each Recording Frame consists of an array of 13 rows of 182 bytes.

182 bytes B0,0

B0,171

B0,172

B0,181 Recording Frame No. 0

13 rows B11,0 B192,0

B11,171 B11,172 B192,171 B192,172

B11,181 B192,181

B12,0

B12,171

B12,181

B12,172

Recording Frame No. 1

13 rows B23,0 B193,0

B23,171 B23,172 B193,171 B193,172

B23,181 B193,181

B180,0

B180,171 B180,172

B180,181 Recording Frame No. 15

13 rows B191,0 B207,0

B191,171 B191,172 B207,171 B207,172

B191,18 B 1 207,181

Figure 31 — Recording Frames obtained from an ECC Block

© Ecma International 2010

47

20 Modulation The 8-bit bytes of each Recording Frame shall be transformed into 16-bit Code Words with the run length limitation that between 2 ONEs there shall be at least 2 ZEROs and at most 10 ZEROs (RLL 2,10). Annex G specifies the conversion Tables to be applied. The Main Conversion Table and the Substitution Table specify a 16-bit Code Word for each 8-bit bytes with one of 4 States. For each 8-bit byte, the Tables indicate the corresponding Code Word, as well as the State for the next 8-bit byte to be encoded. The 16-bit Code Words shall be NRZI-converted into Channel bits before recording on the disk, see Figure 32.

16-bit Code Words

NRZ conversion

Exclusive-OR

16 Channel bits NRZI converted pulses

T T = 1 channel clock period

Figure 32 — NRZI conversion

21 Physical Sectors The structure of a Physical Sector is shown in Figure 33. It shall consist of 13 rows, each comprising two Sync Frames. A Sync Frame shall consist of a SYNC Code from Table 4 and 1 456 Channel bits representing the first, respectively the second 91 8-bit bytes of a row of a Recording Frame. The first row of the Recording Frame is represented by the first row of the Physical Sector, the second by the second, and so on.

48

© Ecma International 2010

32

13 rows

1 456

SY0

SY5

SY1

SY5

SY2

SY5

SY3

SY5

SY4

SY5

SY1

SY6

SY2

SY6

SY3

SY6

SY4

SY6

SY1

SY7

SY2

SY7

SY3

SY7

SY4

SY7 Sync Frame

1 456

32

Sync Frame

97-0025-A

Figure 33 — Physical Sector Recording shall start with the first Sync Frame of the first row, followed by the second Sync Frame of that row, and so on row-by-row.

© Ecma International 2010

49

Table 4 — SYNC Codes State 1 and State 2 Primary SYNC Codes (msb)

Secondary SYNC Codes (lsb) (msb)

(lsb)

SY0 = 0001001001000100 0000000000010001 / 0001001000000100 0000000000010001 SY1 = 0000010000000100 0000000000010001 / 0000010001000100 0000000000010001 SY2 = 0001000000000100 0000000000010001 / 0001000001000100 0000000000010001 SY3 = 0000100000000100 0000000000010001 / 0000100001000100 0000000000010001 SY4 = 0010000000000100 0000000000010001 / 0010000001000100 0000000000010001 SY5 = 0010001001000100 0000000000010001 / 0010001000000100 0000000000010001 SY6 = 0010010010000100 0000000000010001 / 0010000010000100 0000000000010001 SY7 = 0010010001000100 0000000000010001 / 0010010000000100 0000000000010001

State 3 and State 4 Primary SYNC Codes (msb)

Secondary SYNC Codes (lsb) (msb)

(lsb)

SY0 = 1001001000000100 0000000000010001 / 1001001001000100 0000000000010001 SY1 = 1000010001000100 0000000000010001 / 1000010000000100 0000000000010001 SY2 = 1001000001000100 0000000000010001 / 1001000000000100 0000000000010001 SY3 = 1000001001000100 0000000000010001 / 1000001000000100 0000000000010001 SY4 = 1000100001000100 0000000000010001 / 1000100000000100 0000000000010001 SY5 = 1000100100000100 0000000000010001 / 1000000100000100 0000000000010001 SY6 = 1001000010000100 0000000000010001 / 1000000001000100 0000000000010001 SY7 = 1000100010000100 0000000000010001 / 1000000010000100 0000000000010001

The Physical Sector is a sector after the modulation by 8/16 conversion which adds a SYNC Code to the head of every 91 bytes in the Recording Frame.

22 Suppress control of the d.c. component To ensure a reliable radial tracking and a reliable detection of the HF signals, the low frequency content of the stream of Channel bit patterns should be kept as low as possible. In order to achieve this, the Digital Sum Value (DSV, see 4.10) shall be kept as low as possible. At the beginning of the modulation, the DSV shall be set to 0.

50

© Ecma International 2010

The different ways of diminishing the current value of the DSV are as follows: a)

Choice of SYNC Codes between Primary or Secondary SYNC Codes.

b)

For the 8-bit bytes in the range 0 to 87, the Substitution Table offers an alternative 16-bit Code Word for all States.

c)

For the 8-bit bytes in the range 88 to 255, when the prescribed State is 1 or 4, then the 16-bit Code Word can be chosen either from State 1 or from State 4, so as to ensure that the RLL requirement is met.

In order to use these possibilities, two data streams, Stream 1 and Stream 2, are generated for each Sync Frame. Stream 1 shall start with the Primary SYNC Code and Stream 2 with the Secondary SYNC Code of the same category of SYNC Codes. As both streams are modulated individually, they generate a different DSV because of the difference between the bit patterns of the Primary and Secondary SYNC Codes. In the cases b) and c), there are two possibilities to represent an 8-bit byte. The DSV of each stream is computed up to the 8-bit byte preceding the 8-bit byte for which there is this choice. The stream with the lowest DSV is selected and duplicated to the other stream. Then, one of the representations of the next 8-bit byte is entered into Stream 1 and the other into Stream 2. This operation is repeated each time case b) or c) occurs. Whilst case b) always occurs at the same pattern position in both streams, case c) may occur in one of the streams and not in the other because, for instance, the next State prescribed by the previous 8-bit byte can be 2 or 3 instead of 1 or 4. In that case the following 3-step procedure shall be applied: 1)

Compare the DSVs of both streams.

2)

If the DSV of the stream in which case c) occurs is smaller than that of the other stream, then the stream in which case c) has occurred is chosen and duplicated to the other stream. One of the representations of the next 8-bit byte is entered into this stream and the other into the other stream.

3)

If the DSV of the stream in which case c) has occurred is larger than that of the other stream, then case c) is ignored and the 8-bit byte is represented according to the prescribed State.

In both cases b) and c), if the DSVs are equal, the decision to choose Stream 1 or Stream 2 is implementation-defined. The procedure for case a) shall be as follows. At the end of a Sync Frame, whether or not case b) and or case c) have occurred, the DSV of the whole Sync Frame is computed and the stream with the lower DSV is selected. If this DSV is greater than + 63 or smaller than -64, then the SYNC Code at the beginning of the Sync Frame changed from Primary to Secondary or vice versa. If this yields a smaller DSV, the change is permanent, if the DSV is not smaller, the original SYNC Code is retained. During the DSV computation, the actual values of the DSV may vary between -1 000 and +1 000, thus it is recommended that the count range for the DSV be at least from -1 024 to +1 023.

23 Linking scheme The linking scheme is specified for appending data in the Incremental recording mode. It consists of three types of linking methods named 2K-Link, 32K-Link and Lossless-Link.

23.1 Structure of linking The appended data shall be recorded from or to the Linking sector, which is the first Physical Sector of the ECC Block and it contains the linking point. On each linking operation, the data recording shall be terminated at the 16th byte in the first Sync Frame of the Linking sector and shall be started at the 15th to 17th byte in the first Sync Frame of Linking sector. When

© Ecma International 2010

51

a disk is in the case of Figure 34 (b), Block SYNC Guard Area shall be located in the first ECC Block before linking and becomes a part of the Linking Loss Area after linking. The ECC Block address of Layer 0 shall be continuously decreased from the inside to the outside of a disk, however, the ECC Block address of Layer 1 shall be continuously decreased from the outside to the inside of a disk.

23.2 2K-Link and 32K-Link A Linking Loss Area shall be allocated in cases of 2K-Link and 32K-Link to prevent any degradation of the data reliability due to the influence of linking. It may contain padding sectors as shown in Figures 35 (2K-Link) and 36 (32K-Link) and shall have a minimum size of 2 048 bytes and 32 768 bytes respectively. All Main data in the Linking Loss Area shall be set to (00). The Data type bit (see 16.1) of the sector followed by a sector belonging to the Linking Loss Area shall be set to ONE, but the Data type bit of the Linking sector is always set to ZERO. See Figures 35 and 36. The last recorded sector in each RZone shall be recorded by using 2K-Link or 32K-Link and its Data type bit shall be set to ONE.

23.3 Lossless-Link The linking without Linking Loss Area, as shown in Figure 37, is allowed and referred to as Lossless-Link. There is no sector which has the Data type bit of ONE in this linking scheme.

52

© Ecma International 2010

ECC block address (X+1)

ECC block address (X) Linking sector End of recording

SYNC Padding sectors

16 bytes Start of recording 15 to 17 bytes

SYNC

First Sync frame

Second Sync frame

Linking Loss Area (32 K-Link)

(a) Linking at just after the Recorded Area

ECC block address (X)

ECC block address (X+1)

Block SYNC Guard Area Start of recording 15 to 17 bytes

SYNC

SYNC

First Sync frame

Padding sectors

16 bytes

Second Sync frame

End of recording Linking sector Linking Loss Area (32 K-Link)

(b) Linking at just before the Recorded Area Figure 34 — Structure of Linking ECC Block

ECC Block

Padding sectors: (00) Last recorded address Linking sector

Linking Loss Area Data: (00) Data type: ONE

Figure 35 — Structure of ECC Block with Linking Loss Area of 2 048 bytes (2K-Link)

© Ecma International 2010

53

ECC Block

ECC Block

Padding sectors: (00) Last recorded address Linking sector

Linking Loss Area Data: (00) Data type: ONE

Figure 36 — Structure of ECC Block with Linking Loss Area of 32 768 bytes (32K-Link)

ECC Block

ECC Block

Linking sector

Figure 37 — Structure of ECC Block without Linking Loss Area (Lossless-Link)

54

© Ecma International 2010

Section 5 — Format of the Information Zone 24 General description of the Information Zone The Information Zone extending over two layers shall be divided in four parts: the Lead-in Zone, the Data Zones, the Lead-out Zone and the Middle Zones. The Data Zones are intended for the recording of Main Data. The Lead-in Zone contains control information. The Lead-out Zone allows for a continuous smooth read-out. The Middle Zones facilitate layer jump at the end of the Data Zone on Layer 0 and allows for a continuous smooth read-out and read-in on each layer.

24.1 Layout of the Information Zone The Information Zone on Layer 0 shall be sub-divided as shown in Table 5. The values of the radii indicated are nominal values for the first Physical Sector and the last track of the last Physical Sector of a zone. The Information Zone on Layer 1 is also sub-divided according to the zone allocation on Layer 0 as shown in Table 6. Tracks are read from the outer side towards inner side of a disk on Layer 1. Table 5 — Layout of the Information Zone on Layer 0 Nominal radius in mm Lead-in Zone Initial Zone Buffer Zone 0 R-Physical Format Information Zone Reference Code Zone Buffer Zone 1 Control Data Zone Extra Border Zone Data Zone uffer Zone 2 Middle Zone for 120 mm disk Middle Zone for 80 mm disk

© Ecma International 2010

24,0 to r1 r1 to 35,0 min. when r1 < 34,6

r1 to (r1 + 0,4) when 34,6 ≤ r1 ≤ 58,1

r1 to 35,0 min. when r1 < 34,6

r1 to (r1 + 0,4) when 34,6 ≤ r1 ≤ 38,1

Start Sector Number

Number of Physical Sectors

(024440)

4 0384

(02E200)

512

(02E400)

3 072

(02F000)

32

(02F020) (02F200) (02FE00) (030000)

480 3 072 512

55

Table 6 — Layout of the Information Zone on Layer 1

Lead-out Zone

Data Zone

Middle Zone for 120mm and 80mm disks

Nominal radius

Start Sector Number

End Sector Number

Same inner radius as the Lead-in Zone on Layer 0 to r 2

End Sector number of the Data Zone + 1

(FD97DF)

r2 to r3

Bit inverted value to the last sector number of the Data Zone on Layer 0

Start Sector number of the Lead-out Zone -1 Bit inverted value to the start sector number of the Middle Zone on Layer 0

r3 to Same outer radius as Layer 0

24.2 Physical Sector numbering Physical sectors on the track shall not possess any gap and shall be placed continuously from the beginning of the Lead-in Zone to the end of the Middle Zone, as well as from the beginning of the Middle Zone to the end of the Lead-out Zone. The Physical sector numbers of Layer 0 shall continuously increase from the beginning of the Lead-in Zone to the end of the Middle Zone, however, the physical sector numbers of Layer 1 shall take the bit inverted value to that of Layer 0 and shall continuously increase from the beginning of the Middle Zone (outside) to the end of the Lead-out Zone (inside). The first sector number of the Data Zone on Layer 1 shall be the bit-inverted number of the last sector number in the Data Zone on Layer 0. The bit-inverted number shall be calculated so that the bit value of ONE becomes that of ZERO and vice versa. Sectors on each layer with bit-inverted sector numbers to each other are at almost the same distance from the center of the disk. The sector numbers shall be calculated by letting the sector number of the sector placed at the beginning of the Data Zone located after the Lead-in Zone be 196608 (03 0000). See Figure 38.

Physical sector number of Layer 1 *X Physical sector number

Lead -out Zone

Data Zone

X 1 Middle Zone

Layer 1 Layer 0

Lead -in Zone

Data Zone *X Physical sector number of Layer 0

(02 FFFF)

(03 0000)

Middle Zone

X+ 1

Radius

* The sector number X shall be calculated so that each bit value of X is inverted meaning ONE is replaced by ZERO and vice versa. . . The sector number X shall be a multiple of 16.

Figure 38 — Physical Sector numbering

56

© Ecma International 2010

25 Lead-in Zone, Middle Zone and Lead-out Zone 25.1 Lead-in Zone The Lead-in Zone is the innermost zone of the Information Zone on Layer 0. It shall consist of the following parts, see Figure 39:       

Initial Zone, Buffer Zone 0, R-Physical Format Information Zone, Reference Code Zone, Buffer Zone 1, Control Data Zone, Extra Border Zone.

The Sector number of the first Physical Sector of each part is indicated in Figure 39 in hexadecimal notation. Sector No.148 544

Initial Zone In all Physical Sectors the Main Data is set to (00)

Sector No.(024440) (Lead-in start)

Sector No.188 928

Buffer Zone 0 512 Physical Sectors with the Main Data set to (00)

Sector No.(02E200)

Sector No.189 440

R-Physical Format Information Zone 3 072 Physical Sectors

Sector No.(02E400)

Sector No.192 512

Reference Code Zone 32 Physical Sectors

Sector No.(02F000)

Sector No.192 544

Buffer Zone 1 480 Physical Sectors with the Main Data set to (00)

Sector No.(02F020)

Sector No.193 024

Control Data Zone 3 072 Physical Sectors

Sector No.(02F200)

Sector No.196 096

Extra Border Zone 512 Physical Sectors

Sector No.(02FE00)

Sector No.196 608

Data Zone

Sector No.(030000)

Figure 39 — Lead-in Zone 25.1.1 Initial Zone The Main Data of the Data Frames eventually recorded as Physical Sectors in the Initial Zone shall be set to (00). 25.1.2 Buffer Zone 0 This zone shall consist of 512 sectors from 32 ECC Blocks. The Main Data of the Data Frames eventually recorded as Physical Sectors in this zone shall be set to (00).

© Ecma International 2010

57

25.1.3 R-Physical Format Information Zone The R-Physical format information zone shall consist of 192 ECC Blocks (3 072 sectors) starting from Sector number (02E400). The content of the 16 sectors of each R-Physical format information block is repeated 192 times. The structure of a R-Physical format information block shall be as shown in Figure 40. Relative sector number 0

Set to (00)

1

Manufacturing information

2

Physical format information

3 . . .

Set to (00)

. . 15 Figure 40 — Structure of a R-Physical format information block 25.1.3.1

Manufacturing information

This Ecma Standard does not specify the format and the content of these 2 048 bytes. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. 25.1.3.2

Physical format information

This information shall comprise the 2 048 bytes shown in Table 7 and described below. The contents shall be copied from the Pre-recorded Physical format information (see 25.1.6.1) except the DL indicator (BP0), the Maximum transfer rate of a disk (BP1), the Data Zone allocation (BP4 to 15), the Start sector number of Border Zone (BP32 to 39) and the Re-mapping data Block Valid Flag (RBVF, BP42). Table 7 — Physical format information

58

Number of bytes 1

BP

Content

0

Disk Category and DL indicator

1

Disk size and maximum transfer rate of the disk

1

2

Disk structure

1

3

Recorded density

1

4 to 15

Data Zone allocation

12

16

NBCA descriptor

1

17

Maximum recording speed

1

18

Minimum recording speed

1

19 to 25

Recording speed table

7

© Ecma International 2010

Table 7 — Physical format information (concluded) Number of bytes 1

BP

Content

26

Class

27

Extended Version number

1

28 to 31

Set to (00)

4

32 to 39

Sector Number of the first sector of the Border Zone

8

40

Pre-recorded information code

1

41

Tracking polarity flag and AR flag

1

42

Re-mapping data Block Valid Flag (RBVF)

1

43 to 511

Set to (00)

469

512 to 2 047

Extended pre-recorded information

1 536

Byte 0 – Disk Category and DL indicator Bits b0 to b3 shall specify the DL indicator. They shall be set to 1111, indicating this Ecma Standard. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Bits b4 to b7 shall be copied from Pre-recorded Physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. Byte 1 – Disk size and maximum transfer rate of the disk Bits b0 to b3 shall specify the Maximum transfer rate of the disk: If set to 0000, they specify a maximum transfer rate of 2,52 Mbits/s. If set to 0001, they specify a maximum transfer rate of 5,04 Mbits/s. If set to 0010, they specify a maximum transfer rate of 10,08 Mbits/s. If set to 1111, they do not specify a maximum transfer rate. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Bits b4 to b7 shall be copied from Pre-recorded Physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. Byte 2 – Disk structure Bits b0 to b7 shall be copied from Pre-recorded Physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. Byte 3 – Recorded density Bits b0 to b7 shall be copied from Pre-recorded Physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. Bytes 4 to 15 – Data Zone allocation Byte 4 shall be set to (00). Bytes 5 to 7 shall be set to (030000) to specify the Sector number 196 608 of the first Physical Sector of the Data Zone.

© Ecma International 2010

59

Byte 8 shall be set to (00). Bytes 9 to 11 shall specify the Maximum recorded sector number of the Data Zone. Bytes 12 shall be set to (00). Bytes 13 to 15 shall specify the Maximum recorded sector number of the Data Zone on Layer 0. When the Data Zone on Layer 1 is not recorded, these bytes shall be same as the value of BP 9 to 11 in the case of Format1 RMD is used. When Format4 RMD is used, these bytes shall indicate End Sector number of Layer 0. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Byte 16 – NBCA descriptor Bits b0 to b7 shall be copied from Pre-recorded Physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. Byte 17 – Maximum recording speed Bits b0 to b7 shall be copied from Pre-recorded Physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. Byte 18 – Minimum recording speed Bits b0 to b7 shall be copied from Pre-recorded Physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. Byte 19 to 25 – Recording speed table Bits b0 to b7 shall be copied from Pre-recorded Physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. Byte 26 – Class Bits b0 to b7 shall be copied from Pre-recorded Physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. Byte 27 – Extended Version number Bits b0 to b7 shall be copied from Pre-recorded Physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. Bytes 28 to 31 These bytes shall be set to (00). Bytes 32 to 39 – Sector Number of Border Zone Byte 32 shall be set to (00). Bytes 33 to 35 shall specify the Start sector number of the current Border-out. Byte 36 shall be set to (00). Bytes 37 to 39 shall specify the Start sector number of the next Border-in. In the case of Disk at once recording mode, all bytes of these fields shall be set to (00). In the case of Incremental recording mode, "Start sector number of the current Border-out" field shall specify the start sector number of the Border-out of the current Bordered area, and "Start sector number of the next Border-in" field shall specify the start sector number of the Border-in of the next Bordered area. When those fields are set to (00), the next Bordered area shall not be recorded.

60

© Ecma International 2010

When Format1 RMD is used, all bytes of these fields shall be set to (00). If this field is not used in Format4 RMD, all bytes of these fields shall be set to (00). Byte 40 – Pre-recorded information code Bits b0 to b7 shall be copied from Pre-recorded Physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. Byte 41 – Tracking polarity flag and AR flag Bits b0 to b7 shall be copied from Pre-recorded Physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. Byte 42 – Re-mapping data Block Valid Flag Bits b4 to b7 shall be set to 0000. Bits b0 to b3 shall specify the Re-mapping data Block Valid Flag (RBVF No.n, n = 1 to 4), respectively. The status of each RBVF No.n shall represent the validity of the Anchor Point Data (APD No.n, n = 1 to 4) for Remapping recorded in Superficial Border-in/Border-out/Extra Border-in areas, corresponding to each Anchor Point (AP No.n, n = 1 to 4) and each APD No.n. See Annex Q. Each RBVF No.n shall be assigned according to the following rule; ZERO: Re-mapping block sector number for APD No.n is not used. When AP No.n is referred, the original data specified by AP No.n shall be used. ONE:

When AP No.n is referred, the corresponding APD No.n in Superficial Border-in/Border-out area is valid and shall be used.

Bytes 43 to 511 These bytes shall be set to (00). Byte 512 to 2 047 – Extended pre-recorded information Bits b0 to b7 shall be copied from Extended pre-recorded information in Pre-recorded Physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. 25.1.4 Reference Code Zone The Reference Code Zone shall consist of the 32 Physical Sectors from two ECC Blocks which generate specific Channel bit patterns (3T-6T-7T) on the disk. This shall be achieved by setting to (AC) all 2 048 Main Data bytes of each corresponding Data Frame. Moreover, no scrambling shall be applied to these Data Frames, except to the first 160 Main Data bytes of the first Data Frame of each ECC Block. 25.1.5 Buffer Zone 1 This zone shall consist of 480 Physical Sectors from 30 ECC Blocks. The Main Data of the Data Frames eventually recorded as Physical Sectors in this zone shall be set to (00). The last ECC Block of Buffer Zone 1 shall be Block SYNC Guard Area. The Block SYNC Guard Area shall become a part of the Linking Loss Area after linking. The pre-recorded area shall start from the linking sector of the Block SYNC Guard Area. The linking scheme shall be applied for the recording of the Buffer Zone 1 to connect to the Control Data Zone.

© Ecma International 2010

61

25.1.6 Control Data Zone The Control Data Zone shall comprise 192 ECC Blocks (3 072 sectors) starting from Sector number 193 024, (02 F200) and each ECC Block of the Control Data Zone (Control data block) shall be pre-recorded or embossed. The structure of a Control data block shall be as shown in Figure 41. The first and second sectors in each Control data block shall contain the Pre-recorded Physical format information and the Disk manufacturing information respectively, and the contents of the Pre-recorded Physical format information shall be repeated 192 times.

Relative sector number 0

Pre-recorded Physical format information

1

2 048 bytes Disk manufacturing information 2 048 bytes

2 3 .

Reserved for system use

.

14 x 2 048 bytes

. 15

Figure 41 — Structure of a Control data block 25.1.6.1

Pre-recorded Physical format information

This information shall comprise the 2 048 bytes shown in Table 8 and described below. Table 8 — Pre-recorded Physical format information

62

Number of bytes

BP

Content

0

Disk Category and Compatible Version Number

1

1

Disk size and maximum transfer rate of the disk

1

2

Disk structure

1

3

Recorded density

1

4 to 15

Data Zone allocation

12

16

NBCA descriptor

1

17

Maximum recording speed

1

18

Minimum recording speed

1

© Ecma International 2010

Table 8 — Pre-recorded Physical format information (concluded) 19 to 25

Recording speed table

7

26

Class

1

27

Extended Version number

1

28 to 31

Set to (00)

4

32 to 39

Sector Number of the first sector of the Extra Border Zone

8

40

Pre-recorded information code

1

41

Tracking polarity flag and AR flag

1

42 to 511

Set to (00)

470

512 to 2 047

Extended pre-recorded information

1 536

Byte 0 – Disk Category and Compatible Version Number Bits b0 to b3 shall specify the Version Number. They shall be set to 0110, indicating this Ecma Standard. Bits b4 to b7 shall specify the Disk Category. These bits shall be set to 0010, indicating a Recordable disk. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Byte 1 – Disk size and maximum transfer rate of the disk Bits b0 to b3 shall specify the Maximum transfer rate of the disk. They shall be set to 1111, indicating Not specified. Bits b4 to b7 shall specify the Disk size: If the diameter of the disk is 120 mm, they shall be set to 0000. If the diameter of the disk is 80 mm, they shall be set to 0001. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Byte 2 – Disk structure Bits b0 to b3 shall specify the Layer type. They shall be set to 0010, indicating that the disk contains Recordable user data Zone(s). Bit b4 shall specify the Track path. It shall be set to ONE, indicating Opposite Track Path. Bits b5 and b6 shall specify the Number of layers. These bits shall be set to 01, indicating Dual layer. Bit b7 shall be set to ZERO. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard.

© Ecma International 2010

63

Byte 3 – Recorded density Bits b0 to b3 shall specify the Average track pitch. They shall be set to 0000, indicating the average track pitch of 0,74 µm. Bits b4 to b7 shall specify the Channel bit length. They shall be set to 0001, indicating 0,147 µm. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Bytes 4 to 15 – Data Zone allocation Byte 4 shall be set to (00). Bytes 5 to 7 shall be set to (030000) to specify the Sector Number 196 608 of the first Physical Sector of the Data Zone. Byte 8 shall be set to (00). Bytes 9 to 11 shall specify the End sector number of the Data Zone. These bytes shall be set to the sector number corresponding to the ECC Block address specified in the pre-pit information for Pre-pit data block of Field ID2. See 27.3.6.1. Byte 12 shall be set to (00). Bytes 13 to 15 shall specify the End sector number of Layer 0. These bytes shall be set to the sector number corresponding to the ECC Block address specified in the pre-pit information for Pre-pit data block of Field ID1. See 27.3.5.3. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Byte 16 – NBCA descriptor Bit b7 shall specify whether or not there is NBCA on the disk, see Annex K. If NBCA does not exist, it shall be set to ZERO. If NBCA exists, it shall be set to ONE. Bit b6 to b0 shall be set to 000 0000. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Byte 17 – Maximum recording speed This byte shall specify the Maximum applicable recording speed of a disk. These bits shall be set to 0000 0000 to indicate 2x-speed recording. NOTE

This byte is reserved according to the following rule:

0001 0000 to indicate 4x-speed recording 0010 0000 to indicate 6x-speed recording 0011 0000 to indicate 8x-speed recording

64

© Ecma International 2010

0100 0000 to indicate 10x-speed recording 0101 0000 to indicate 12x-speed recording

Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Byte 18 – Minimum recording speed This byte shall specify the minimum applicable recording speed of the disk. This byte shall be set to 0000 0000 to indicate 2x-speed recording for a Class 0 disk. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Bytes 19 to 25 – Recording speed table Each byte of Bytes 19 to 25 shall specify all other recording speeds supported by the disk than the maximum and minimum recording speeds assigned in Byte 17 and 18. Bits assignment rule of each byte is same as Byte 17. Each recording speed shall be assigned continuously and unused field shall be set (00) that does not mean 2x-speed recording. Byte 26 – Class This byte shall specify the Class. This byte shall be set to 0000 0000 to indicate the Class 0 and the Basic recording speed is 2x-speed. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Byte 27 – Extended Version number This byte shall specify actual version number of the disk. This byte shall be set to 0011 0000, indicating this Ecma Standard. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Bytes 28 to 31 These bytes shall be set to (00). Bytes 32 to 39 – Sector number of the 1st sector of the Extra Border Zone Bytes 32 to 35 shall specify the Start sector number of Current RMD in Extra Border Zone. These bytes shall be set to (0002FE10). Bytes 36 to 39 shall specify the Start sector number of Physical format information blocks in Extra Border Zone. These bytes shall be set to (0002FFA0). Byte 40 – Pre-recorded information code This byte shall specify the pre-recorded area on a disk. The following areas can be pre-recorded by disk manufacturers:

© Ecma International 2010

65

Table 9 — Pre-recorded areas Areas which can be pre-recorded

ECC Block address

Lead-in Zone except Extra Border Zone and RPhysical format information zone

(FFDBBB) to (FFD000) (without NBCA)

Lead-out Zone

(FFD2A4) to (FFD000) (with NBCA) Y-33 to (002942) (without NBCA) Y-33 to (002F99) (with NBCA)

NOTE Y is the Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1 specified in the pre-pit information for Pre-pit data block of Field ID2. See 27.3.6.

Bit b0 shall be set to ZERO to indicate Control Data Zone is pre-recorded. Bit b1 shall be set to indicate the pre-recording status of Lead-in Zone. Bit b1 shall be set to ZERO when Lead-in Zone is not pre-recorded. Bit b1 shall be set to ONE when Lead-in Zone is pre-recorded. Bit b2 shall be set to ZERO. Bit b3 shall be set to indicate the pre-recording status of Lead-out Zone. Bit b3 shall be set to ZERO when Lead-out Zone is not pre-recorded. Bit b3 shall be set to ONE when Lead-out Zone is pre-recorded. Bits b4 to b7 shall be set to ZERO. Byte 41 – Tracking polarity flag and AR flag Bits b0 to b3 shall specify the AR characteristic of LPP on Layer 1. This byte shall be set to 0000, indicating this Ecma Standard. Bits b4 to b7 shall specify the tracking polarity on Layer 1. This byte shall be set to 0000, indicating this Ecma Standard. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Bytes 42 to 511 These bytes shall be set to (00). Bytes 512 to 2 047 – Extended pre-recorded information These bytes shall specify Extended pre-recorded information. Extended pre-recorded information shall include the contents in the Pre-pit data block Field ID1 to ID5 and the 2x-speed recording conditions, and the other bytes in this field shall be set to (00) for future extension. The contents of the Extended pre-recorded information are classified and determined by the PFI (Physical Format Information) Field ID as shown in Table 10. See 27.3. The reserved field (Bytes 632 to 2 047) shall be used to store the parameters of the recording conditions for the extended recording speed. Unused PFI Field shall be set to (00).

66

© Ecma International 2010

Table 10 — Extended pre-recorded information BP

Contents

Number of bytes

512

PFI Field ID descriptor

1

513 to 519

Set to (00)

7

520 to 527

PFI Field ID0

8

528 to 535

PFI Field ID1

8

536 to 543

PFI Field ID2

8

544 to 551

PFI Field ID3

8

552 to 559

PFI Field ID4

8

560 to 567

PFI Field ID5

8

568 to 575

PFI Field ID6

8

576 to 583

PFI Field ID7

8

584 to 591

PFI Field ID8

8

592 to 599

PFI Field ID9

8

600 to 607

PFI Field ID10

8

608 to 615

PFI Field ID11

8

616 to 623

PFI Field ID12

8

624 to 631

PFI Field ID13

8

632 to 2 047

Set to (00)

1 416

25.1.6.1.1 PFI Field ID descriptor This byte shall specify the maximum PFI Field ID number of the existing fields of the Extended pre-recorded information. This byte shall be set to (0D), indicating the maximum PFI Field ID number is 13 for a disk which supports 2xspeed as a maximum recording speed for each layer. NOTE (15):

This field is reserved according to the following rule: Maximum PFI Field ID number is 21 for a disk which supports 4x-speed as a maximum recording speed for each layer

(1D): Maximum PFI Field ID number is 29 for a disk which supports 6x-speed as a maximum recording speed for each layer (25):

Maximum PFI Field ID number is 37 for a disk which supports 8x-speed as a maximum recording speed for each layer

(2D): Maximum PFI Field ID number is 45 for a disk which supports 10x-speed as a maximum recording speed for each layer (35):

Maximum PFI Field ID number is 53 for a disk which supports 12x-speed as a maximum recording speed for each layer

Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard.

© Ecma International 2010

67

25.1.6.1.2 PFI Field ID0 The Extended pre-recorded data of PFI Field ID0 shall be as shown in Table 11. Table 11 — Extended pre-recorded data of PFI Field ID0 BP

NOTE

Contents

RBP

520

PFI Field ID (00)

0

521 to 527

Set to (00)

1 to 7

RBP indicates the relative byte position from the first byte in each PFI Field ID information.

25.1.6.1.3 PFI Field ID1 to ID5 The extended pre-recorded data configuration of PFI Field ID1 to ID5 shall be as shown in Table 12. See 27.3.5, 27.3.6, 27.3.7 and 27.3.8. Table 12 — Extended pre-recorded data of PFI Field ID1 to ID5 BP

NOTE

68

Contents

RBP

528

PFI Field ID (01)

0

529 to 534

These contents shall be copied from the pre-pit data frame 7 to 12 in the pre-pit data block Field ID1. Note that the Extension code 1 to 6 (Byte 534) does not indicate the maximum number of PFI Field ID.

535

Set to (00)

7

536

PFI Field ID (02)

0

537 to 542

These contents shall be copied from the pre-pit data frame 7 to 12 1 to 6 in the pre-pit data block Field ID2.

543

Set to (00)

7

544

PFI Field ID (03)

0

545 to 550

These contents shall be copied from the pre-pit data frame 7 to 12 1 to 6 in the pre-pit data block Field ID3

551

Set to (00)

7

552

PFI Field ID (04)

0

553 to 558

These contents shall be copied from the pre-pit data frame 7 to 12 1 to 6 in the pre-pit data block Field ID4

559

Set to (00)

7

560

PFI Field ID (05)

0

561 to 566

These contents shall be copied from the pre-pit data frame 7 to 12 1 to 6 in the pre-pit data block Field ID5.

567

Set to (00)

7

RBP indicates the relative byte position from the first byte in each PFI Field ID information.

© Ecma International 2010

25.1.6.1.4 PFI Field ID6 to ID13 The Extended pre-recorded data of PFI Field ID6 to ID13 shall be as shown in Table 13. The contents of PFI Field ID6 to ID9 and ID10 to ID13 shall indicate the 2x-speed recording conditions for Layer 0 and for Layer 1 respectively. Table 13 — Extended pre-recorded data of PFI Field ID6 to ID13 BP

NOTE

Contents

RBP

568

PFI Field ID (06)

0

569

2x-speed OPC suggested code ( value) for Layer 0

1

570

2x-speed OPC suggested code (Recording power) for Layer 0

2

571 to 574

1st byte to 4th byte of 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0

3 to 6

575

Set to (00)

7

576

PFI Field ID (07)

0

577 to 582

5th byte to 10th byte of 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0

1 to 6

583

Set to (00)

7

584

PFI Field ID (08)

0

585 to 590

11th byte to 16th byte of 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0

1 to 6

591

Set to (00)

7

592

PFI Field ID (09)

0

593 to 599

Set to (00)

1 to 7

600

PFI Field ID (0A)

0

601

2x-speed OPC suggested code ( value) for Layer 1

1

602

2x-speed OPC suggested code (Recording power) for Layer 1

2

603 to 606

1st byte to 4th byte of 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1

3 to 6

607

2x-speed OPC suggested code (Recording power shift) for Layer 1

7

608

PFI Field ID (0B)

0

609 to 614

5th byte to 10th byte of 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1

1 to 6

615

Set to (00)

7

616

PFI Field ID (0C)

0

617 to 622

11th byte to 16th byte of 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1

1 to 6

623

Set to (00)

7

624

PFI Field ID (0D)

0

625 to 631

Set to (00)

1 to 7

RBP indicates the relative byte position from the first byte in each PFI Field ID field.

Bytes 569 and 601 – 2x-speed OPC suggested code ( value) These bytes specify the optimum  value for 2x-speed recording of a disk. Byte 601 shall specify the optimum  value for Layer 1 determined through the recorded Layer 0. The table of the  value code shall be as shown in Table 14.

© Ecma International 2010

69

The optimum recording power corresponding to the assigned  value shall be used for the testing of a disk for 2x-speed recording. See Annex H. Table 14 — 2x-speed OPC suggested code ( value)

*NOTE notation.

2x-speed OPC suggested code

 value

(00)

reserved

(01) to (1F)

– 0.11 + (Value* × 0.01)

(20) to (FF)

reserved

Value is determined by converting the 2x-speed OPC suggested code in hexadecimal notation to decimal

Bytes 570 and 602 – 2x-speed OPC suggested code (Recording power) These bytes specify the optimum recording power for 2x-speed recording of a disk. Byte 602 shall specify the optimum recording power for Layer 1 determined through the recorded Layer 0. The Recording power code shall be as shown in Table 15. If it is not specified, this code shall be set to (00). See Annex H. Table 15 — 2x-speed OPC suggested code (Recording power)

*NOTE notation.

2x-speed OPC suggested code

Recording power

(00)

Not specified

(01) to (08)

reserved

(09) to (49)

5.5 mW + (Value* × 0.5 mW)

(4A) to (FF)

reserved

Value is determined by converting the 2x-speed OPC suggested code in hexadecimal notation to decimal

Bytes 571 to 574, 577 to 582, 585 to 590, 603 to 606, 609 to 614, 617 to 622 – 2x-speed Write Strategy code These bytes shall indicate the Write Strategy variations for 2x-speed recording for each layer, specified in 14.3. The 2x-speed Write Strategy code shall consist of 16 bytes of user data located in PFI Field ID6 to ID8 for Layer 0 and in PFI Field ID10 to ID12 for Layer 1, as shown in Table 16. The 1st byte to the 10th byte of the 2x-speed Write Strategy codes for each layer shall indicate the basic parameters, and the 11th byte to the 16th byte of the 2x-speed Write Strategy codes for each layer shall indicate the adaptive parameters. Table 16 — 2x-speed Write Strategy code field PFI Field ID

ID6 / ID10

70

RBP

Contents (code)

3

3Ttop

4

4Ttop

5

nTtop

© Ecma International 2010

Table 16 — 2x-speed Write Strategy code field (concluded) PFI Field ID

RBP

Contents (code)

6

nTwt

1

ID7 / ID11

ID8 / ID12

nTlp

Toff

2

3Tdtop

3

4Tdtop

4

Po/Pm

5

5Ttop2

5Tlp2

6

5Tld

5Ttr2

1

3-3Tld

3-3Ttr

3-4Tld

3-4Ttr

2

3-5Tld

3-5Ttr

3-5Tld2

3-5Ttr2

3

4-3Tld

4-3Ttr

4-4Tld

4-4Ttr

4

4-5Tld

4-5Ttr

4-5Tld2

4-5Ttr2

5

5-3Tld

5-3Ttr

5-4Tld

5-4Ttr

6

5-5Tld

5-5Ttr

5-5Tld2

5-5Ttr2

a. Basic parameters of 2x-speed Write Strategy 3Ttop, 4Ttop and nTtop codes shall indicate the top pulse width of the write pulse for 3T, 4T and nT (n = 5 to 11 and 14) respectively, as specified in Table 17 and Table 18. nTwt code shall indicate the write pulse width for nT (where n = 5 to 11 and 14) as specified in Table 19. nTlp code shall indicate the last pulse width for nT (where n = 5 to 11 and 14) as specified in Table 20. Toff code shall indicate the length of the off pulse as shown in Table 21. 3Tdtop and 4Tdtop codes shall indicate the trailing edge shift of the write pulses for 3T and 4T respectively, as specified in Table 22. Po/Pm code shall indicate the recording power ratio of the optimum recording power (Po) and middle power (Pm), as specified in Table 23. 5Ttop2 and 5Tlp2 codes shall indicate the differences of the top pulse width and the last pulse width of the 5Twrite pulse from nTtop and nTlp respectively, as specified in Table 24. 5Tld and 5Ttr2 codes shall indicate the shift of the leading edge of the top pulse and the trailing edge of the write pulse for the 5T-write pulse respectively, as specified in Table 25 and Table 26. By applying 5Ttop2, 5Tlp2, 5Tld and 5Ttr2 codes, each parameter of the 5T-write pulse is represented as follows: 5Ttop = nTtop + 5Ttop2 + 5Tld 5Tlp = nTlp + 5Tlp2 – 5Ttr2 If nTlp is assigned as 0T, 5Tlp2 shall be set to 0T and 5Ttr2 affects the trailing edge of the write pulse.

© Ecma International 2010

71

Table 17 — 3Ttop, nTtop codes Code

*NOTE

Pulse width

(00)

Field is invalid

(01) to (59)

0.475T + (Value* × 0.025T)

(5A) to (FF)

reserved

Value is determined by converting the codes in hexadecimal notation to decimal notation.

Table 18 — 4Ttop code 4Ttop code

*NOTE

4Ttop pulse width

(00)

Field is invalid

(01) to (65)

0.975T + (Value* × 0.025T)

(66) to (FF)

reserved

Value is determined by converting the 4Ttop code in hexadecimal notation to decimal notation.

Table 19 — nTwt code nTwt code

*NOTE

nT write pulse width

(00)

reserved

(01) to (3D)

(n–1)T – 2.05T + (Value* × 0.05T)

(3E) to (FF)

reserved

Value is determined by converting the nTwt code in hexadecimal notation to decimal notation.

Table 20 — nTlp code nTlp code

*NOTE

nT last pulse width

(0)

reserved

(1) to (9)

– 0.25T + (Value* × 0.25T)

(A) to (F)

reserved

Value is determined by converting the nTlp code in hexadecimal notation to decimal notation.

Table 21 — Toff code Toff code

*NOTE

Off pulse length

(0) to (5)

Value* × 0.50T

(6) to (F)

reserved

Value is determined by converting the Toff code in hexadecimal notation to decimal notation.

When Toff code is not applied, this field shall be set to (0).

72

© Ecma International 2010

Table 22 — 3Tdtop, 4Tdtop codes Code

*NOTE

Trailing edge shift

(00)

reserved

(01) to (51)

– 1.025T + (Value* × 0.025T)

(52) to (FF)

reserved

Value is determined by converting the codes in hexadecimal notation to decimal notation.

Table 23 — Po/Pm code Po/Pm code

*NOTE

Recording power ratio

(00)

reserved

(01) to (3D)

0.975 + (Value* × 0.025)

(3E) to (FF)

reserved

Value is determined by converting the Po/Pm code in hexadecimal notation to decimal notation.

Table 24 — 5Ttop2, 5Tlp2 codes Code

*NOTE

Difference of pulse width

(0)

reserved

(1) to (F)

– 0.55T + (Value* × 0.05T)

Value is determined by converting the codes in hexadecimal notation to decimal notation.

Table 25 — 5Tld code Code

*NOTE

Leading edge shift

(0)

reserved

(1) to (F)

– 0.55T + (Value* × 0.05T)

Value is determined by converting the code in hexadecimal notation to decimal notation.

Table 26 — 5Ttr2 code Code

*NOTE

Trailing edge shift

(0)

reserved

(1) to (F)

– 0.25T + (Value* × 0.05T)

Value is determined by converting the code in hexadecimal notation to decimal notation.

b. Adaptive parameters of 2x-speed Write Strategy m-nTld and m-nTtr codes shall indicate the shift of the leading edge and the trailing edge of the top pulse respectively, according to the combination of the preceding space length and the recording data length, see 14.3 and Table 27. In the cases where the preceding space length is mT and the recording data length is nT,

© Ecma International 2010

73

each code is identified as m-nTld and m-nTtr (m = 3, 4, 5 and n = 3, 4, 5). Where m or n is equal to 5, then the feature over 5T (5T to 11T and 14T) are indicated. In the case of m-nTld code where n = 5, m-5Tld code for only 5T-write pulse is already assigned in RBP6 of the PFI Field ID7 and ID11, therefore the shift of the leading edge of the 5T top pulse shall be (5Tld + m-5Tld). m-5Tld2 and m-5Ttr2 codes shall indicate the shift of the leading edge and the trailing edge of the last pulse for the recording data over 5T respectively, according to the preceding space length, see 14.3 and Table 27. In the cases where the preceding space length is mT, each code is identified as m-5Tld2 and m-5Ttr2 (m = 3, 4, 5). Where m is equal to 5, then the feature over 5T (5T to 11T and 14T) are indicated. m-5Ttr2 code for only 5T-write pulse is already assigned in RBP6 of the PFI Field ID7 and ID11, therefore the shift of the trailing edge of the 5T last pulse shall be (5Ttr2 + m-5Ttr2). When nTlp code is assigned as 0T, m-5Ttr2 code affects the trailing edge of each write pulse. Table 27 — m-nTld, m-nTtr, m-5Tld2, m-5Ttr2 codes Code

Shift of each edge

00

0.00T

01

0.05T

10

– 0.05T

11

– 0.10T

Byte 607 – 2x-speed OPC suggested code (Recording power shift) for Layer 1 This byte shall specify the recording power shift of Layer 1 depending on the recorded status of Layer 0. The Recording power shift shall be calculated by the following equation: Recording power shift = Po1 / Po2 where: Po1:

Optimum recording power of Layer 1 through the unrecorded Layer 0

Po2:

Optimum recording power of Layer 1 through the recorded Layer 0

The Recording power shift code shall be assigned as shown in Table 28. See Annex H. Table 28 — 2x-speed OPC suggested code (Recording power shift) for Layer 1 2x-speed OPC suggested code

Recording power shift

(00)

reserved

(01) to (1F)

0.89 + (Value* × 0.01)

(20) to (FF)

reserved

*NOTE notation.

Value is determined by converting the 2x-speed OPC suggested code in hexadecimal notation to decimal

25.1.6.2

Disk manufacturing information

This Ecma Standard does not specify the format and the content of these 2 048 bytes. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, they shall be ignored in interchange.

74

© Ecma International 2010

25.1.6.3

Reserved for system use

The bit setting in this field is application dependent, for instance a video application. If this setting is not specified by the application, the default setting shall be all ZEROs. 25.1.7 Extra Border Zone The configuration of Extra Border Zone on Layer 0 shall be as shown in Table 29. Table 29 — Structure of Extra Border Zone on Layer 0 Unit Position 0

Contents Disk at once recording mode

Incremental recording mode

Linking Loss Area (All (00))

1 to 5

Current RMD

6 to 25

Set to (00)

26 to 30

Physical format information blocks

31

Set to (00)

Block SYNC Guard Area

Unit Position indicates the relative ECC block position from the beginning of Extra Border Zone. The Data type bit of the sector just before each Sector 0 in the 5 copies of current RMD shall be set to ZERO. Physical format information block shall be recorded five times with a data structure as shown in Figure 42. Physical format information 2 048 bytes Manufacturing information 2 048 bytes

Set to (00)

Figure 42 — Structure of Physical format information block Physical format information shall be as specified in 25.1.3.2. Manufacturing information shall be as specified in 25.1.3.1.

25.2 Middle Zone The start sector number (the most inner position) of the Middle Zone on Layer 0 shall be the next number of the sector number specified by Bytes 13 to 15 in the Pre-recorded Physical format information which indicates the End Sector number of Layer 0.

© Ecma International 2010

75

The sector number of the Middle Zone in the most inner position on Layer 1 shall take the bit inverted value to the start sector number of the Middle Zone on Layer 0. All the Main data of the Data frames eventually recorded as Physical sectors in the Middle Zone shall be set to (00) except for the most inner seven ECC blocks on each layer. When Reduced Border-out is applied, these seven ECC blocks shall be Reduced Border-out, otherwise, these area shall be set to (00).

25.3 Lead-out Zone When Format1 RMD is used, all the Main data of the Data frames eventually recorded as Physical sectors in the Lead-out Zone shall be set to (00). 25.3.1 Structure of Lead-out Zone with Format4 RMD When Format4 RMD is used, the Lead-out Zone shall consist of the Superficial Extra Border Zone and the Buffer zone as shown in Figure 43. All the Main data of the Data frames eventually recorded as Physical sectors in the Buffer zone shall be set to (00).

Data Zone Superficial Extra Border Zone (32 ECC blocks)

Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1 See 27.3.6.1.

Buffer zone (00)

The inner most side of the Information Zone on Layer 1

Figure 43 — Structure of Lead-out Zone with Format4 RMD 25.3.2 Superficial Extra Border Zone The configuration of Superficial Extra Border Zone on Layer 1 shall be as shown in Table 30. Table 30 — Structure of Superficial Extra Border Zone on Layer 1 Unit Position

76

Contents

0

Linking Loss Area (All (00) bytes)

1

APD No.1(Anchor Point Data No.1)

2

APD No.2(Anchor Point Data No.2)

3

APD No.3(Anchor Point Data No.3)

4

APD No.4(Anchor Point Data No.4)

5 to 30

Set to (00)

31

Linking Loss Area (00)

© Ecma International 2010

Unit Position indicates the relative position from the most outer position of the Superficial Extra Border Zone. After setting the Re-mapping block sector number and closing the first Border, APD No.n (Anchor Point Data No.1 to Anchor Point Data No.4) shall be copied from the contents of the ECC block pointed by the Remapping block sector number for AP No.n in current Format4 RMD Field3. See Annex Q.

© Ecma International 2010

77

Section 6 — Format of the Unrecorded Zone 26 General description of the Unrecorded Zone A continuous spiral pre-groove forms the track of the Unrecorded Zone. The track extends from the inner part of the disk to the outer part of the disk on Layer 0 and from the outer part of the disk to the inner part of the disk on Layer 1 respectively. The track is wobbled at a specified frequency to control the drive functions. The precise address information for an unrecorded disk is embossed on the land between adjacent grooved regions. The Unrecorded Zone shall be divided into three parts: the R-Information Zone, the Initial Information Zone and the Outer Disk Testing Area. The R-Information Zone shall be divided into two parts: the Inner Disk Testing Area and the Recording Management Area. The Initial Information Zone of each layer shall be divided into three parts with Opposite Track Path as shown in Figure 44. Starting from the inner radius on Layer 0, these zones are the Lead-in Zone, the Data Recordable Zone, and the fixed Middle Zone. Starting from the outer radius on Layer 1, these zones are the fixed Middle Zone, the Data Recordable Zone, and the Lead-out Zone. The shifted Middle Zone can be added to inner side accompanying with flexible Outer Disk Testing Area and unrecorded area. The allocation of the Lead-out Zone and the Middle Zone will be determined by finalization. These six zones are essential and identical in principle to the same zones on a dual layer type of DVD-Read-Only disk. The recording data shall be recorded in the pre-groove guided by the wobble and Pre-pit Information that is embossed in the land. The accurate start address before recording shall be determined by decoding the Pre-pit Information on the land.

26.1 Layout of the Unrecorded Zone The Unrecorded Zone of each layer shall be sub-divided as shown in Table 31 and 32 respectively. The ECC Block address (see Clause 26.2) of the first block of each zone is shown in those tables. Table 31 — Layout of the Unrecorded Zone on Layer 0 ECC Block address of the first block of the Zone

Number of blocks

Inner Disk Testing Area

(FFE077)

581

Recording Management Area

(FFDE31)

629

(FFDBBB)

3 004

Data Recordable Zone

(FFCFFF)

130 806

fixed Middle Zone

(FDD109)*

1 088

Outer Disk Testing Area

(FDCCC9)

1 091

R-Information Zone

Lead-in Zone

* NOTE

78

The outermost address of the Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 will be determined by a disk manufacturer.

© Ecma International 2010

Table 32 — Layout of the Unrecorded Zone on Layer 1 ECC Block address of the first block of the Zone

Number of blocks

Inner Disk Testing Area

(00240A)

581

Recording Management Area

(0025A2)

189

Lead-out Zone

(00336F)*

3 311

Data Recordable Zone

(022EF5)*

129 926

fixed Middle Zone

(023573)

1 662

Outer Disk Testing Area

(0239B6)

1 091

R-Information Zone

* NOTE

Those addresses will be determined by a disk manufacturer.

26.2 ECC Block address The ECC Block address (see 4.13 and 27.3.2) shall be the absolute physical address of the track. The start and stop positions of each zone shall be defined using the ECC Block address. The address shall decrease from the inside to outside diameter of the disk on Layer 0 and from the outside to inside diameter of the disk on Layer 1, respectively. The address shall be embossed on the land as the Pre-pit Information.

26.3 ECC Block numbering The ECC Block address shall be calculated by setting the ECC Block address so that the block placed at the beginning of the Data Zone shall be (FFCFFF). This first block of the Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 shall be located after the Lead-in Zone as shown in Figure 44.

X 1

X

R-Information Zone Lead-out Zone

fixed Middle Zone

Data Recordable Zone ECC Block address of Layer 0

Recording Management Area

ECC block address

Inner Disk Testing Area

Lead-in Zone

Initial Information Zone Data Recordable Zone

fixed Middle Zone

Layer 1 Layer 0

ECC Block address of Layer 1

(FF D000)

(FFCFFF)

X

Outer Disk Testing Area

ECC block address

X-1

radius

Figure 44 — Pre-pit sector layout and ECC Block numbering

© Ecma International 2010

79

27 Pre-pit Data format 27.1 General description The Pre-pit Data is embossed as a sequence of Pre-pits on the land. The Pre-pit Data sequence corresponds to 16 sectors of the same physical size as 1 ECC Block to be recorded in the groove. One set of Pre-pits shall be given by 3 bits (b2, b1, b0) every two SYNC Frames. The first set of Pre-pits in a Pre-pit physical sector is the Pre-pit SYNC Code. The first bit of the 3 bits is called the frame SYNC bit. In the Incremental recording mode, the frame SYNC bit shall be located at the special position of the recorded SYNC Code of the 16-bit Code Words in the groove. The assignment of these bits shall be as shown in Table 33. Table 33 — Assignment of Land Pre-pit b2

b1

b0

Pre-pit SYNC Code in Even position

1

1

1

Pre-pit SYNC Code in Odd position

1

1

0

Pre-pit data set to ONE

1

0

1

Pre-pit data set to ZERO

1

0

0

The assigned position of Pre-pits and the SYNC pattern of 16-bit Code words shall be as shown in Figures 45 and 46. The relation in phase between wobble and Land Pre-pit also shall be as specified in 14.5.3.

1 Physical sector size 1 SYNC frame

land Recorded SYNC code position in the groove

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

22

23

24

25

Groove to be recorded

land

Pre-pit SYNC code on Land in Even position

Pre-pit SYNC code on Land in Odd position

Data ONE in Even position

Data ZERO in Odd position

Figure 45 — Track formation

80

© Ecma International 2010

SYNC pattern recorded in pre-groove XXXXX0010000000000000100 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

16-bit Code words SYNC code recorded in mark style

SYNC code recorded in space style

Pre-pit Sync code on land in Even position Pre-pit Sync code on land in Odd position Pre-pit data : ONE Pre-pit data : ZERO

Detected wobble signal

Figure 46 — Relationship of signals recorded in groove and land There are two cases of Pre-pit position in two SYNC Frames called Even position and Odd position. Normally the Pre-pit should be recorded at the Even position. In mastering, when there is already a Pre-pit on the neighbouring land, the position of the Pre-pits shall be shifted to the Odd position sequence. Such a case is described in Figure 47. The Pre-pits position can be shifted in a Pre-pit physical sector. Land Pre-Pit position Inside on the disk surface

groove land groove land groove land groove land groove Overlapped Outside on the disk surface

Even position Odd position

Figure 47 — Layout of land Pre-pit positioning

© Ecma International 2010

81

The Pre-pit data frame shall consist of 4 bits of relative address specified in 27.3.1 and 8 bits of user data. Pre-pit data shall be recorded in the user data area of the Pre-pit data frame. The Pre-pit data frame shall be as shown in Figure 48. The Pre-pit physical sector shall be a Pre-pit data frame after transforming 1 bit into 3 bits and adding Pre-pit SYNC Code. The Pre-pit physical sector shall be recorded on the land as part of the Land Pre-Pit recording. See Figure 49 and Table 33. Relative address

User data

4 bits

8 bits

Figure 48 — Pre-pit data frame structure Pre-pit SYNC Code

Transformed relative address

Transformed user data

3 bits

12 bits

24 bits

Figure 49 — Pre-pit physical sector structure

27.2 Pre-pit block structure A Pre-pit data block shall be constructed with 16 Pre-pit data frames. The Pre-pit data block shall have two data parts, part A and part B. Part A shall consist of 3 bytes of ECC Block address (see 27.3.2) and 3 bytes of parity A (see 27.3.3), and relative address 0000 to 0101 (see 27.3.1), thus Part A is constructed with 6 Pre-pit data frames. Part B shall consist of 1 byte of Field ID, 6 bytes of disk information and 3 bytes of parity B and relative address 0110 to 1111. Thus Part B is constructed with 10 Pre-pit data frames. The Pre-pit physical block shall be constructed with 16 Pre-pit physical sectors which are constructed by transforming each 1 bit of Pre-pit data block to 3 bits and adding the Pre-pit SYNC Code. This signal processing shall be as shown in Figure 50. ECC Block address + relative address

 add parity A 

Part A

Field ID + disk information + relative address

 add parity B 

Part B

Part A + Part B



Pre-pit data block

Pre-pit data block

 transform 1 bit into 3 bits 

Pre-pit physical block before adding Pre-pit SYNC Code

 add Pre-pit SYNC Code 

Pre-pit physical block

Figure 50 — Processing order to construct a Pre-pit block

82

© Ecma International 2010

The Pre-pit block structure shall be as shown in Figure 51. A Pre-pit physical block shall be as shown schematically in Figure 52. Pre-pit physical block (using transformed Pre-pit data block, see Table 33) Pre-pit data block

Pre-pit SYNC Code

Relative address

ECC Block address (3 bytes)

0000 to 0101

Parity A (3 bytes)

Relative address

Pre-pit field ID and disk information (7 bytes)

0110 to 1111

Part A

Part B

Parity B (3 bytes) Figure 51 — Pre-pit block structure

© Ecma International 2010

83

26 SYNC Frames Pre-Pit SYNC Code and relative address Pre-Pit part A and part B information E G L G L G L G L G L G L G L G L G L G L G L G L G L G L G L G L

O

E

O

E

O

E

O

E

O

E O E O E O E O E O E O E O E O A

111

100

100

100

100

ECC Block address

111

100

100

100

101

ECC Block address

111

100

100

101

100

ECC Block address

111

100

100

101

101

Parity A

111

100

101

100

100

Parity A

111

100

101

100

101

Parity A

111

100

101

101

100

Field ID

111

100

101

101

101

disk information

111

101

100

100

100

disk information

111

101

100

100

101

disk information

111

101

100

101

100

disk information

111

101

100

101

101

disk information

111

101

101

100

100

disk information

111

101

101

100

101

Parity B

111

101

101

101

100

Parity B

111

101

101

101

101

Parity B

No.0 No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5

B

No.6 No.7 No.8 No.9 No.10 No.11 No.12 No.13 No.14 No.15

Legend: i. G means groove, L means land, E means even position, O means odd position. ii. Pre-pits SYNC Code is shown in even position in this representation. Relativ e address Pre-pit Data ONE is represented by 101 and Pre-pit Data ZERO is represented by 100 in this representation. The assignment of land Pre-pits is specified in Table 33. iii. Last column is the Pre-pit Physical Sector Number in a Pre-pit physical block. iv. Second from last column denotes the part A and part B of the Pre -pit physical block structure. Figure 52 — Pre-pit physical block

27.3 Pre-pit data block configuration User data of Part A and Part B is called Pre-pit information. Pre-pit information of Part A shall be the ECC Block address. Pre-pit information of Part B shall be recorded in the disk information fields of Part B.

84

© Ecma International 2010

The contents of the disk information in Part B are classified and shall be distinguished by Field ID. Therefore each Pre-pit data block including the classified Part B shall be distinguished by a Field ID. The classification and the location of the Pre-pit data blocks shall be as shown in Table 34. Table 34 — Classification and location of Pre-pit data blocks Field ID

Contents of disk information in Part B

Location

0

ECC Block address / Layer Information code

All Zones

1

Application code / Physical data / Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0

2

Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1

3

1st field of Manufacturer ID

4

2nd field of Manufacturer ID

5

reserved

Lead-in Zone

In the Lead-in Zone, Pre-pit data blocks of Field ID 1 to 5 shall be recorded as shown in Figure 53. Field ID

Location

ECC Block address

Field ID1

Start of the Lead-in Zone

(FFDBBB)

Field ID2 Field ID3 Field ID4 Field ID5 Field ID1 Field ID2 Field ID3 Field ID4 Field ID5 Field ID1 : : : Field ID4 Field ID5 Field ID0

(FFD003)

Field ID0

(FFD002)

Field ID0

(FFD001)

Field ID0 Field ID0

End of the Lead-in Zone

(FFD000) (FFCFFF)

Figure 53 — Layout of Pre-pit data blocks in the Lead- in Zone

© Ecma International 2010

85

27.3.1 Relative address The Pre-pit data frame contains a relative address. The relative address shows the position of 16 Pre-pit data frames (one Pre-pit data block). Four bits shall be used to specify the relative address. 0000

First Pre-pit data frame

0001

Second Pre-pit data frame

: : 1111

Last Pre-pit data frame

The relative address number shall be equal to the decimal value represented by the least significant 4 bits of the Physical Sector Number recorded in the groove. The relative address shall not have error detection and error correction code. 27.3.2 ECC Block address data configuration The ECC Block address shall be equal to the bit-inverted decimal value represented by b23 to b4 of the Physical Sector Number recorded in the adjacent inner groove. The ECC Block address at the start of Data Zone shall be (FFCFFF) as shown in Figure 54.

Groove : Physical sector number Land : ECC Block address Lead-out Zone Layer 1

(DD10A0) (FCC8FF) (022EF5) (003370) Data Recordable Zone

fixed Middle Zone

Layer 0 Lead-in Zone

Data Recordable Zone

fixed Middle Zone

Groove : Physical sector number Land : ECC Block address

(030000) (FFCFFF)

(22EF5F) (FDD10A)

Figure 54 — Relation between Physical Sector Number and ECC Block address The allocation of the Lead-out Zone and the Middle Zone are determined by Finalization. The outermost address of the Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 and the innermost address of the Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1 shall be assigned by a disk manufacturer. The addresses in this figure except the innermost address of the Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 are example values. See 27.3.5.3 and 27.3.6.1. 27.3.3 Parity A and Parity B When in Figure 51, each byte allocated in the matrix is Cj (j = 0 to 15), then each byte for parity, Cj (j = 3 to 5 and j = 13 to 15), shall be as follows: Parity A: 5

Parity A(x) = Cj x5-j

= I(x) x3 mod GE(x)

j=3

86

© Ecma International 2010

where 2

I(x) =  Cj x2-j j=0 2

GE(x) =  ( x + k ) k=0

 is the primitive root of the primitive polynomial Gp(x) = x 8 + x 4 + x 3 + x 2 + 1. Parity B: 15

Parity B(x) =  Cj x15-j = I(x) x3 mod GE(x) j = 13

where 12

I(x) =  Cj x12-j j=6 2

GE(x) =  ( x + k ) k=0

 is the primitive root of the primitive polynomial Gp(x) = x 8 + x 4 + x 3 + x 2 + 1.

© Ecma International 2010

87

27.3.4 Field ID0 The Pre-pit data block configuration of Field ID0 shall be as shown in Figure 55. Bit Position

Pre-pit data frame number

1 to 4

5 (msb) to 12 (lsb)

0000

First byte of ECC Block address

0001

Second byte of ECC Block address

2

0010

Third byte of ECC Block address

3

0011

First byte of Parity A

4

0100

Second byte of Parity A

5

0101

Third byte of Parity A

6

0110

Field ID (00)

7

0111

First byte of ECC Block address

8

1000

Second byte of ECC Block address

9

1001

Third byte of ECC Block address

10

1010

Layer Information code

11

1011

Set to (00)

12

1100

Set to (00)

13

1101

First byte of Parity B

14

1110

Second byte of Parity B

15

1111

Third byte of Parity B

0

0 Pre-pit SYNC Code*

1

Part A

Part B

* The Pre-pit SYNC Code shall be added to the Pre-pit data block to construct the Pre-pit physical block. Figure 55 — Pre-pit data block configuration of Field ID0 27.3.4.1

Layer Information code

The Layer Information code shall be specified as follows: Bit b5

ZERO

: Layer 0

ONE

: Layer 1

Bit b6 to b12 set to ZERO

88

© Ecma International 2010

27.3.5 Field ID1 The Pre-pit block configuration of Field ID1 shall be as shown in Figure 56. Bit Position

Pre-pit data frame number 0

0

1 to 4

5 (msb) to 12 (lsb)

1

Pre-pit SYNC 0000 Code* 0001

First byte of ECC Block address Second byte of ECC Block address

2

0010

Third byte of ECC Block address

3

0011

First byte of Parity A

4

0100

Second byte of Parity A

5

0101

Third byte of Parity A

6

0110

Field ID (01)

7

0111

Application code

8

1000

Disk physical code

9

1001

10

1010

11

1011

12

1100

13

1101

First byte of Parity B

14

1110

Second byte of Parity B

15

1111

Third byte of Parity B

Part A

First byte of Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 Second byte of Last address of Data Recordable Zone Part B

on Layer 0 Third byte of Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 Version number

Extension code

* The Pre-pit SYNC Code shall be added to the Pre-pit data block to construct the Pre-pit physical block. Figure 56 — Pre-pit data block configuration of Field ID1 27.3.5.1

Application code

The Application code shall be specified as follows: Bit Position 5

set to ZERO

Bit Position 6

set to ZERO

: Disk for restricted use

Bit Position 7 to 12

set to 000000

: reserved for single layer DVD-R disk

set to 000010

: DVD-R for DL disk with Class 0

Bit Position 7 to 12

set to others

: Special purpose disk for use only in special drives

Bit Position 6

set to ONE

: Disk for unrestricted use

Bit Position 7 to 12

set to 000000

: reserved for single layer DVD-R disk

Bit Position 7 to 12

set to others

: Reserved

© Ecma International 2010

89

27.3.5.2

Disk physical code

Basic physical characteristics of the disk shall be specified in the Disk physical code field as shown in Table 35. Table 35 — Disk physical code Bit position

Content

Bit settings and meaning

5 (msb)

Track pitch

Set to ONE, indicating the track pitch is 0,74 m

6

Reference velocity

Set to ZERO, indicating the reference velocity is 3,84 m/s

7

Disk diameter

ZERO = 120 mm

8

Reflectivity(1)

Set to ONE, indicating the reflectivity is 16 % to 27 %

9

Reflectivity(2)

Set to ZERO

10

Media type(1)

ZERO = Organic dye

11

Media type(2)

Set to ZERO, indicating Recordable media

12 (lsb)

Media type(3)

Set to One, indicating Opposite Track Path

27.3.5.3

ONE = 80 mm

ONE = others

Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0

The last ECC Block address of the Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 shall be specified in hexadecimal notation in the Last Address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 field. The last ECC Block address shall be defined to ensure the user data capacity of 8,54 Gbytes per side for 120 mm disk, and 2,66 Gbytes per side for 80 mm disk respectively. The Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 does not indicate the minimum ECC Block address of the disk but indicates the outer limit of the Data Recordable Zone. The Pre-pit physical block on Layer 0 shall extend toward the outer diameter of the disk, beyond the zone indicated by the last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0. NOTE

An example of assignment of this field for 120 mm disk is (FDD10A).

27.3.5.4

Version Number

These bits shall be assigned as same as the Compatible Version number specified in the Pre-recorded physical format information. See 25.1.6.1. 27.3.5.5

Extension code

These bits shall be set to 0000, indicating this Ecma Standard. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard.

90

© Ecma International 2010

27.3.6 Field ID2 The Pre-pit data block configuration of Field ID2 shall be as shown in Figure 57. Bit position

Pre-pit data frame number

0

1 to 4

5 (msb) to 12 (lsb)

Pre-pit SYNC Code*

0000

First byte of ECC Block address

0001

Second byte of ECC Block address

2

0010

Third byte of ECC Block address

3

0011

First byte of Parity A

4

0100

Second byte of Parity A

5

0101

Third byte of Parity A

6

0110

Field ID (02)

7

0111

Set to (00)

8

1000

Set to (00)

9

1001

First byte of Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1

10

1010

Second byte of Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1 Part B

11

1011

Third byte of Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1

12

1100

Set to (00)

13

1101

First byte of Parity B

14

1110

Second byte of Parity B

15

1111

Third byte of Parity B

0 1

Part A

* The Pre-pit SYNC Code shall be added to the Pre-pit data block to construct the Pre-pit physical block. Figure 57 — Pre-pit data block configuration of Field ID2 27.3.6.1

Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1

The last ECC Block address of the Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1 shall be specified in hexadecimal notation in the Last Address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1 field. The last ECC Block address shall be defined to ensure the user data capacity of 8,54 Gbytes per side for 120 mm disk, and 2,66 Gbytes per side for 80 mm disk respectively. The Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1 does not indicate the minimum ECC Block address of the disk but indicates the inner limit of the Data Recordable Zone. The Pre-pit physical block on Layer 1 shall extend toward the inner diameter of the disk, beyond the zone indicated by the last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1. This field shall be set more than or equal to (00332A). When NBCA is applied, this field shall be set more than or equal to (003370).

© Ecma International 2010

91

27.3.7 Field ID3 and Field ID4 The Pre-pit data block configuration of Field ID3 and Field ID4 shall be as shown in Figures 58 and 59. This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of the 12 bytes designated as Manufacturer ID. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Pre-pit data frame number

Bit position 0

1 to 4

5 (msb) to 12 (lsb)

Pre-pit SYNC Code*

0000

First byte of ECC Block address

0001

Second byte of ECC Block address

2

0010

Third byte of ECC Block address

3

0011

First byte of Parity A

4

0100

Second byte of Parity A

5

0101

Third byte of Parity A

6

0110

Field ID (03)

7

0111

First byte of Manufacturer ID

8

1000

Second byte of Manufacturer ID

9

1001

Third byte of Manufacturer ID

10

1010

Fourth byte of Manufacturer ID

11

1011

Fifth byte of Manufacturer ID

12

1100

Sixth byte of Manufacturer ID

13

1101

First byte of Parity B

14

1110

Second byte of Parity B

15

1111

Third byte of Parity B

0 1

Part A

Part B

* The Pre-pit SYNC Code shall be added to the Pre-pit data block to construct the Pre-pit physical block. Figure 58 — Pre-pit data block configuration of Field ID3

92

© Ecma International 2010

Bit position

Pre-pit data frame number

0

1 to 4

5 (msb) to 12 (lsb)

Pre-pit SYNC Code*

0000

First byte of ECC Block address

0001

Second byte of ECC Block address

2

0010

Third byte of ECC Block address

3

0011

First byte of Parity A

4

0100

Second byte of Parity A

5

0101

Third byte of Parity A

6

0110

Field ID (04)

7

0111

Seventh byte of Manufacturer ID

8

1000

Eighth byte of Manufacturer ID

9

1001

Ninth byte of Manufacturer ID

10

1010

Tenth byte of Manufacturer ID

11

1011

Eleventh byte of Manufacturer ID

12

1100

Twelfth byte of Manufacturer ID

13

1101

First byte of Parity B

14

1110

Second byte of Parity B

15

1111

Third byte of Parity B

0 1

Part A

Part B

* The Pre-pit SYNC Code shall be added to the Pre-pit data block to construct the Pre-pit physical block. Figure 59 — Pre-pit data block configuration of Field ID4

© Ecma International 2010

93

27.3.8 Field ID5 The Pre-pit data block configuration of Field ID5 shall be as shown in Figure 60. Pre-pit data frame number 0

Bit Position 0

1 to 4

5 (msb) to 12 (lsb)

1

Pre-pit SYNC 0000 Code* 0001

First byte of ECC Block address Second byte of ECC Block address

2

0010

Third byte of ECC Block address

3

0011

First byte of Parity A

4

0100

Second byte of Parity A

5

0101

Third byte of Parity A

6

0110

Field ID (05)

7

0111

Set to (00)

8

1000

Set to (00)

9

1001

Set to (00)

10

1010

Set to (00)

11

1011

Set to (00)

12

1100

Set to (00)

13

1101

First byte of Parity B

14

1110

Second byte of Parity B

15

1111

Third byte of Parity B

Part A

Part B

* The Pre-pit SYNC Code shall be added to the Pre-pit data block to construct the Pre-pit physical block. Figure 60 — Pre-pit data block configuration of Field ID5

28 Data structure of R-Information Zone and ODTA 28.1 Layout of Disk Testing Area and Recording Management Area The Inner Disk Testing Area (IDTA) and the Recording Management Area (RMA) on each layer are located in the R-Information Zone and situated adjacent to the inside of the Lead-in Zone and the Lead-out Zone, respectively. Outer Disk Testing Area (ODTA) is situated adjacent to the outside of the fixed Middle Zone. See Figure 61. ODTA can be added to the inner side together with the Middle Zone as an option for devices. In this case, the Middle Zone and the ODTA are called as the shifted Middle Zone and the flexible ODTA respectively.

94

© Ecma International 2010

R-Information Zone Groove : Physical sector number Land : ECC Block address

(FDE39F) (0021C6)

(FDBF50) (00240A)

(FD 97F0) (002680)

IDTA

RMA

Lead-out Zone

IDTA

RMA

Lead-in Zone

Layer 1 Layer 0

Groove : Physical sector number Land : ECC Block address

(01F880) (FFE077)

(021CCF) (FFDE33)

(02FFFF) (FFD000)

(02442F) (FFDBBD)

Outer Disk Testing Area Groove : Physical sector number Land : ECC Block address

(DCA8BF) (023574)

(DC6490) (0239B6)

Data Recordable Zone

Middle Zone

ODTA

Data Recordable Zone

Middle Zone

ODTA

Groove : Physical sector number Land : ECC Block address

(233360) (FDCCC9)

Layer 1 Layer 0

(23778F) (FDC887)

Figure 61 — Address layout of the R-Information Zone and ODTA

28.2 Structure of the Disk Testing Area The Inner Disk Testing Area shall be located from ECC Block address (FFE077) to (FFDE33) on Layer 0 and from (00240A) to (0021C6) on Layer 1. See Figure 62. The Outer Disk Testing Area shall be located from ECC Block address (FDCCC9) to (FDC887) on Layer 0 and from (0239B6) to (023574) on Layer 1. See Figure 63. When the shifted Middle Zone is applied, the start sector number of shifted Middle Zone shall be set in the RMD Field0. See 28.3.2.1.1 (Bytes 86 to 89) and 28.3.2.2.1 (Bytes 86 to 89). In this case, the flexible Outer Disk Testing Area can be located adjacent to the outside of the shifted Middle Zone. The flexible Outer Disk Testing Area can co-exist with the Outer Disk Testing Area. However, it shall be located so as not to overlap with the Middle Zone originally allocated. Therefore, when the address X is set to the Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 in the pre-pit data block Field ID1, the shifted Middle Zone shall be located inner than or equal to X+(AC1) on Layer 0 and X - (AC1) on Layer 1 respectively. When the address Y is the Last address of Data Recordable Zone according to adoption of the shifted Middle Zone, the shifted Middle Zone and flexible ODTA shall be located as shown in Table 36. When the shifted Middle Zone and the flexible ODTA are applied, the outer diameter of Information Zone shall satisfy the requirement as described in 10.7. Therefore, if the diameter of the address Y is smaller than 69.2 mm, the shifted Middle Zone shall be located up to 70.0 mm and the flexible ODTA shall be located as shown in Table 36.

© Ecma International 2010

95

Table 36 — Allocation of shifted Middle Zone and flexible ODTA

Layer 0

Layer 1

Diameter of address Y

shifted Middle Zone

flexible ODTA

< 69.2

(Y1) to (FF598C)

(FF598B) to (FF5549)

 69.2

(Y 1) to (Y 440)

(Y 441) to (Y 883)

< 69.2

(00A8B1) to ( Y + 1)

(00ACF4) to (00A8B2)

  69.2

( Y 67E) to ( Y 1)

( Y AC1) to ( Y 67F)

Disk Testing Area on one layer shall not be overlapped by the Disk Testing Area on the other layer. Therefore Gap in radial direction shall be allocated between the Disk Testing Area on each layer, and the position of Gap shall be flexible according the usage of each Disk Testing Area. In each Disk Testing Area, the recording power calibration shall be performed by the following procedure. The minimum segment for a power calibration shall be one Pre-pit Physical sector and is referred to as a power calibration sector. The power calibration process shall be performed continuously from the start to the end of the power calibration sector. It is recommended that signal with enough readout amplitude should be recorded at the sector taking the largest address value in the used sectors on each power calibration process to find out the boundary with unused area easily. The signal should have a length of at least 4 consecutive Sync frames of power calibration sector and at least 0.5 of Modulation amplitude (I14/I14H) or equivalent. See Figure 13. This signal should be recorded at the sector taking the largest address value in the used sectors, and at least once in every 32 consecutive sectors. The IDTA shall consist of 581 ECC blocks (9 296 sectors) per each Layer. When Gap locates in the IDTA, the size of Gap and usable area for OPC in IDTA are 257 ECC blocks (4 112 sectors) and 324 ECC blocks (5 184 sectors) respectively. The ODTA shall consist of 1 091 ECC blocks (17 456 sectors) per each layer. When Gap locates in the ODTA, the size of Gap and usable area for OPC in ODTA are 676 ECC blocks (10 816 sectors) and 415 ECC Blocks (6 640 sectors) respectively. The structure of the Disk Testing Area shall be as shown in Figure 62 and Figure 63. The power calibration of Layer 0 shall be performed from the outside to the inside of the disk, and the power calibration of Layer 1 shall be performed from the inside to the outside of the disk. 16 ECC blocks (256 power calibration sectors) in the most outer side of the IDTA on Layer 0 shall be reserved for the disk manufacturer. The IDTA for drive shall consist of 4 928 power calibration sectors. 16 ECC blocks (256 power calibration sectors) in the most inner side of the ODTA on Layer 1 shall be reserved for the disk manufacturer. The ODTA for drive shall consist of 6 384 power calibration sectors. The power calibration process for disk manufacturer shall be user specific, but it is recommended that at least outer 8 ECC blocks in the IDTA on Layer 0 and inner 8 ECC blocks in the ODTA on Layer 1 should be kept unrecorded state to make stable the recordings of the first RMD and the first Middle Zone, respectively.

96

© Ecma International 2010

Inner Disk Testing Area (IDTA) Power calibration direction of Layer 1 IDTA for drive (9 040 sectors) ECC block address

Unused blank area (256 sectors)

(0021C6)

1

2

(0023FA)

3

(FFE077) (FFDE43)

(00240A)

Layer 1 Layer 0

4 4

ECC block address

(0023FB)

3

2

1

(FFDE42)

(FFDE33)

IDTA for disk manufacturer (256 sectors)

IDTA for drive (9 040 sectors)

Power calibration direction of Layer 0

Figure 62 — Structure of Inner Disk Testing Area

Outer Disk Testing Area (ODTA) Power calibration direction of Layer 1 ODTA for disk manufacturer (256 sectors) ECC block address

(023574)

(023583)

ODTA for drive (17 200 sectors) (023584)

1

2

(0239B6)

3

4 4

ECC block address

(FDCCC9)

(FDCCBA)

(FDCCB9)

Unused blank area (256 sectors)

3

2

1

Layer 1 Layer 0

(FDC887) ODTA for drive (17 200 sectors)

Power calibration direction of Layer 0

Figure 63 — Structure of Outer Disk Testing Area

28.3 Data configuration of the Recording Management Area (RMA) 28.3.1 Sector format of the Recording Management Area The Recording Management Area shall be located from ECC Block address (FFDE31) to (FFDBBD) on Layer 0 and (0025A2) to (0024E6) on Layer 1. Unused area located on both sides of the RMA on Layer 1 shall not be used for recordings to keep the Recording order. See Annex O. The RMA shall be constructed with a RMA Lead-in and Recording Management Data (RMD). The size in bytes of the RMA Lead-in is 32 768 bytes and is constructed with the System Reserved Field of size 16 384 bytes and the Unique Identifier (ID) Field of size 16 384 bytes.

© Ecma International 2010

97

The data in the System Reserved Field shall be set to (00). The Unique ID Field shall be constructed with eight units which have the same 2 048 bytes size and contents. The byte assignment of each unit shall be as shown in Table 37. RMA of Layer 0

IDTA

RMA of Layer 1

Not used

first RMD

Unique ID Field (16 384 bytes)

Not used System Reserved Field (16 384 bytes)

Block SYNC Guard Area (32 768 bytes)

Layer 1 Layer 0 RMA Lead-in

Linking Loss Area (32 768 bytes)

Lead-in Zone first IDTA

Linking Loss Area (32 768 bytes)

System Reserved Field (16 384 bytes)

Unique ID Field (16 384 bytes)

first RMD

Figure 64 — Layout of the Recording Management Area Table 37 — Contents of Unique ID Field BP

Content

0 to 31

Drive manufacturer ID

32 to 39

Set to (00)

40 to 55

Serial Number

56 to 63

Set to (00)

64 to 79

Model Number

80 to 87

Set to (00)

88 to 105

Unique Disk ID

106 to 2 047

Set to (00)

Bytes 0 to 31 – Drive manufacturer ID This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these 32 bytes. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 32 to 39 These bytes shall be set to (00). Bytes 40 to 55 - Serial number This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these 16 bytes. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 56 to 63 These bytes shall be set to (00).

98

© Ecma International 2010

Bytes 64 to 79 - Model number This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these 16 bytes. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 80 to 87 These bytes shall be set to (00). Bytes 88 to 105 - Unique Disk ID This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these 18 bytes. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 106 to 2 047 These bytes shall be set to (00). 28.3.2 Recording Management Data (Format1 RMD and Format4 RMD) Recording Management Data (RMD) shall contain the information for recordings on the disk. Two kinds of RMD format are specified for a DVD-R for DL disk and each RMD format shall include the following information. Format1 RMD: Information related to Incremental recording mode and Disk at once recording mode. In this mode, Data Recordable Zone shall be used sequentially from the start point of the Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0. User data shall be recorded on Layer 1 after recording or reserving whole Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0. Format4 RMD: Information related to Incremental recording mode including Layer jump recording mode. In this mode, Data Recordable Zone shall be used sequentially from the start point of the Data Recordable Zone with a recording unit which consists of the Data Recordable Zone on both of Layer 0 and Layer 1. The structure of each RMD format shall be as shown in Table 38. Table 38 — Data structure of Format1 RMD and Format4 RMD Structure Sector number

RMD Field Format1

Format4

Sector0

Linking Loss Area

Linking Loss Area

Linking Loss Area

Sector1

Field0

Common information

Common information

Sector2

Field1

OPC related information

OPC related information

Sector3

Field2

User specific data

User specific data

Sector4

Field3

Set to (00)

Border Zone information

Sector5

Field4

Sector6

Field5

Sector7

Field6

Sector8

Field7

Sector9

Field8

Format1 RZone information No.1 to No.254 Format1 RZone information No.255 to No.510 Format1 RZone information No.511 to No.766 Format1 RZone information No.767 to No.1 022 Format1 RZone information No.1 023 to No.1 278

Format4 RZone information No.1 to No.125 Format4 RZone information No.126 to No.253 Format4 RZone information No.254 to No.381 Format4 RZone information No.382 to No.509 Format4 RZone information No.510 to No.637

© Ecma International 2010

99

Table 38 — Data structure of Format1 RMD and Format4 RMD (concluded) Structure Sector number

RMD Field Format1

Format4 Format4 RZone information No.638 to No.765 Format4 RZone information No.766 to No.893 Format4 RZone information No.894 to No.1 021 Format4 RZone information No.1 022 to No.1 149 Drive Specific Information Disk Testing Area information

Sector10

Field9

Sector11

Field10

Sector12

Field11

Sector13

Field12

Sector14

Field13

Format1 RZone information No.1 279 to No.1 534 Format1 RZone information No.1 535 to No.1 790 Format1 RZone information No.1 791 to No.2 046 Format1 RZone information No.2 047 to No.2 302 Drive Specific Information

Sector15

Field14

Disk Testing Area information

28.3.2.1

Format1 RMD

28.3.2.1.1 Format1 RMD Field0 Format1 RMD Field0 shall specify general information of the disk and the contents of this field shall be as specified in Table 39. Table 39 — Format1 RMD Field0 BP

Contents

Number of bytes

0 and 1 2

RMD format Disk status

2 1

3

Set to (00)

1

4 to 21

Unique Disk ID

18

22 to 85

Copy of Pre-pit Information

64

86 to 89

Start sector number of the shifted Middle Zone

4

90

Pre-recorded information code

1

91

Set to (00)

1

92 to 95

End address of pre-recorded Lead-in Zone

4

96 to 99

End address of pre-recorded Middle Zone on Layer 0

4

100 to 103

Start address of pre-recorded Middle Zone on Layer 1

4

104 to 107

Start address of pre-recorded Lead-out Zone

4

108 to 2 047

Set to (00)

1 940

Bytes 0 and 1 - RMD format These bytes shall be set to (0001). Byte 2 - Disk status This field shall specify the disk status as follows: If set to (00), they specify that the disk is empty. If set to (01), they specify that the disk is in Disk at once recording mode.

100

© Ecma International 2010

If set to (02), they specify that the disk is in Incremental recording mode. If set to (03), they specify that the disk is a finalized disk in the case of Incremental recording mode. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Byte 3 This byte shall be set to (00). Bytes 4 to 21- Unique Disk ID This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these 18 bytes. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 22 to 85 - Copy of Pre-pit Information The copy of Pre-pit Information that is specified in 27.3 shall be recorded in this field. The recording format shall be as shown in Table 40. Table 40 — Copy of Pre-pit Information BP

Contents

22

Field ID set to (01)

23

Application code

24

Disk physical code

25 to 27

Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0

28

Part Version

29

Set to (00)

30

Field ID set to (02)

31 to 32

Set to (00)

33 to 35

Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1

36 to 37

Set to (00)

38

Field ID set to (03)

39 to 44

1st field of Manufacturer ID

45

Set to (00)

46

Field ID set to (04)

47 to 52

2nd field of Manufacturer ID

53

Set to (00)

54

Field ID set to (05)

55 to 60

Set to (00)

61 to 85

Set to (00)

Extension code

Bytes 86 to 89 – Start sector number of the shifted Middle Zone These bytes shall specify the Start sector number of the shifted Middle Zone when the shifted Middle Zone is applied. If the shifted Middle Zone is not applied, these bytes shall be set to (00).

© Ecma International 2010

101

Byte 90 – Pre-recorded information code This byte shall specify the pre-recorded area on a disk. The areas specified in Table 41 can be pre-recorded by a disk manufacturer or a recording device and assigned according to the following rule. In Finalization state, the contents of all fields relating to Pre-recorded information (Byte 90, Bytes 92 to 107) are invalid. Bit b0 shall be set to ZERO to indicate Control Data Zone is pre-recorded. Bit b1 shall be set to indicate the pre-recording status of Lead-in Zone. Bit b1 shall be set to ZERO when Lead-in Zone is not pre-recorded. Bit b1 shall be set to ONE when Lead-in Zone is pre-recorded. Bit b2 shall be set to indicate the pre-recording status of Middle Zone. Bit b2 shall be set to ZERO when Middle Zone is not pre-recorded. Bit b2 shall be set to ONE when Middle Zone is pre-recorded. Bit b3 shall be set to indicate the pre-recording status of Lead-out Zone. Bit b3 shall be set to ZERO when Lead-out Zone is not pre-recorded. Bit b3 shall be set to ONE when Lead-out Zone is pre-recorded. Bits b4 to b7 shall be set to ZERO. Table 41 — Pre-recorded areas Areas which can be pre-recorded

ECC Block address

Lead-in Zone except Extra Border Zone and R-Physical format information zone

(FFDBBB) to (FFD000) (without NBCA)

Middle Zone

Lead-out Zone

(FFD2A4) to (FFD000) (with NBCA) X-8 to (FDCF6D) and (023573) to X  8 (for a 120 mm disk) X-8 to (FF2F22) and (00D4D6) to X  8 (for an 80 mm disk) Y-33 to (002942) (without NBCA) Y-33 to (002F99) (with NBCA)

NOTE 1 X is the Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 specified in the pre-pit information for Pre-pit data block of Field ID1. See 27.3.5. NOTE 2 Y is the Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1 specified in the pre-pit information for Pre-pit data block of Field ID2. See 27.3.6.

Byte 91 This byte shall be set to (00).

102

© Ecma International 2010

Bytes 92 to 95 - End address of pre-recorded Lead-in Zone These bytes shall specify the end ECC Block address of the pre-recorded Lead-in Zone. When Bit b1 of Byte 40 in the Pre-recorded Physical format information is set to ONE, no pre-recording of the Lead-in Zone by a recording device shall be permitted. See 25.1.6.1. When Bit b1 of Byte 40 in the Pre-recorded Physical format information is set to ZERO, a recording device can pre-record the Lead-in Zone. Bytes 96 to 99 - End address of pre-recorded Middle Zone on Layer 0 These bytes shall specify the end ECC Block address of the pre-recorded Middle Zone on Layer 0. Bytes 100 to 103 - Start address of pre-recorded Middle Zone on Layer 1 These bytes shall specify the start ECC Block address of the pre-recorded Middle Zone on Layer 1. Bytes 104 to 107 - Start address of pre-recorded Lead-out Zone These bytes shall specify the start ECC Block address of the pre-recorded Lead-out Zone. When Bit b3 of Byte 40 in the Pre-recorded Physical format information is set to ONE, no pre-recording of the Lead-out Zone by a recording device shall be permitted. See 25.1.6.1. When Bit b3 of Byte 40 in the Pre-recorded Physical format information is set to ZERO, a recording device can pre-record the Lead-out Zone. Bytes 108 to 2 047 These bytes shall be set to (00). 28.3.2.1.2 Format1 RMD Field1 RMD Field1 shall contain OPC related information. In Format1 RMD Field1 it is possible to record OPC related information for up to 4 drives that may coexist in a system. See Table 42. In the case of a single drive system, OPC related information shall be recorded in field No.1 and the other fields shall be set to (00). In every case, the unused fields of Format1 RMD Field1 shall be set to (00).

© Ecma International 2010

103

Table 42 — Format1 RMD Field1

BP 0 to 31 32 to 47 48 to 63 64 to 79 80 to 83 84 to 91 92 to 95 96 to 107 108 to 123 124 to 125 126 to 127 128 to 159 160 to 175 176 to 191 192 to 207 208 to 211 212 to 219 220 to 213 224 to 235 236 to 251 252 to 253 254 to 255 256 to 287 288 to 303 304 to 319 320 to 335 336 to 339 340 to 347 348 to 351 352 to 363 364 to 379 380 to 381 382 to 383 384 to 415 416 to 431 432 to 447 448 to 463 464 to 467 468 to 475 476 to 479 480 to 491 492 to 507 508 to 509 510 to 511 512 to 2 047

104

Contents No. 1

No.2

No.3

No.4

Set to (00)

Drive manufacturer ID Serial number Model number 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0 Recording power Time stamp Power calibration address Running OPC information 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1 DSV Set to (00) Drive manufacturer ID Serial number Model number 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0 Recording power Time stamp Power calibration address Running OPC information 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1 DSV Set to (00) Drive manufacturer ID Serial number Model number 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0 Recording power Time stamp Power calibration address Running OPC information 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1 DSV Set to (00) Drive manufacturer ID Serial number Model number 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0 Recording power Time stamp Power calibration address Running OPC information 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1 DSV Set to (00)

Number of bytes 32 16 16 16 4 8 4 12 16 2 2 32 16 16 16 4 8 4 12 16 2 2 32 16 16 16 4 8 4 12 16 2 2 32 16 16 16 4 8 4 12 16 2 2 1 536 © Ecma International 2010

Bytes 0 to 31, 128 to 159, 256 to 287, 384 to 415 – Drive manufacturer ID This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 32 to 47, 160 to 175, 288 to 303, 416 to 431 – Serial number This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 48 to 63, 176 to 191, 304 to 319, 432 to 447 – Model number This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 64 to 79, 192 to 207, 320 to 335, 448 to 463 – 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0 These fields shall specify the 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0 in the Extended pre-recorded data of PFI Field ID6 to ID8. The Write Strategy code shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1.4. Bytes 80 to 83, 208 to 211, 336 to 339, 464 to 467 – Recording power This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 84 to 91, 212 to 219, 340 to 347, 468 to 475 – Time stamp This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 92 to 95, 220 to 223, 348 to 351, 476 to 479 - Power calibration address These fields shall specify the start ECC Block address of the DTA where the last power calibration was performed. If these fields are set to (00), they shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 96 to 107, 224 to 235, 352 to 363, 480 to 491 - Running OPC information This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 108 to 123, 236 to 251, 364 to 379, 492 to 507 – 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1 These fields shall specify the 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1 in the Extended pre-recorded data of PFI Field ID10 to ID12. The Write Strategy code shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1.4. Bytes 124 to 125, 252 to 253, 380 to 381, 508 to 509 - DSV These fields shall specify the last DSV in binary notation when the Incremental recording mode is selected. If these fields are set to (00), they are invalid. b15

b14

b13

b12

b7

b6 b5 Initial value

b4

b11 b10 Initial value b3 b2 Next state

b9

b8

b1 T-flag

b0 Set to 0

Figure 65 — DSV field

© Ecma International 2010

105

The first byte and bit b7 to b5 of the second byte shall be used to indicate the initial DSV of the next Incremental recording. This field represents  1023 at the maximum, using 11 bits. See Clause 22. Bit b4 to b2 of the second byte shall be used to indicate the next state of the 16-bit Code word. This field represents 1 to 4 according to the specified state. See Clause 21. Bit b1 of the second byte shall be used to indicate the last bit value in the 16-bit Cord word (ONE or ZERO). ONE represents a space and ZERO represents a recorded mark. The DSV shall be determined from the initial state of the second Sync frame in the Linking Sector of the previous recording. Bytes 116 to 127, 244 to 255, 372 to 383, 500 to 511 These bytes shall be set to (00). Bytes 512 to 2 047 These bytes are reserved for parameters of recording conditions for extended recording speed. Unused fields shall be set to (00). 28.3.2.1.3 Format1 RMD Field2 Format1 RMD Field2 may specify user specific data. If this field is not used, it shall be set to (00). This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these bytes unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. 28.3.2.1.4 Format1 RMD Field3 All bytes in this field shall be set to (00). 28.3.2.1.5 Format1 RMD Field4 Format1 RMD Field4 shall specify the information of RZone and the contents of this field shall be as specified in Table 43. The portion of the Data Recordable Zone that is reserved for recording user data is called the RZone. The RZone shall be divided into 2 types depending on the recording conditions. In an Open RZone, the additional data can be appended. In a Complete RZone, no further user data can be appended. There shall not be more than three Open RZones in a Data Recordable Zone. The portion of the Data Recordable Zone that is not yet reserved for recording data is called the Invisible RZone. The zones for subsequent RZones can be reserved in the Invisible RZone. If no further data can be appended, no Invisible RZone exists. Table 43 — Format1 RMD Field4 BP

106

Contents

Number of bytes

0 and 1

Invisible RZone number

2

2 and 3

First Open RZone number

2

4 and 5

Second Open RZone number

2

6 and 7

Third Open RZone number

2

8 to15

Set to (00)

8

16 to 19

Start sector number of RZone No.1

4

20 to 23

Last recorded address of RZone No.1

4

© Ecma International 2010

Table 43 — Format1 RMD Field4 (concluded) BP

Contents

Number of bytes

24 to 27

Start sector number of RZone No.2

4

28 to 31

Last recorded address of RZone No.2

4

: :

: :

: :

2 040 to 2 043

Start sector number of RZone No.254

4

2 044 to 2 047

Last recorded address of RZone No.254

4

Bytes 0 and 1 - Invisible RZone number This field shall specify the Invisible RZone number. The Invisible RZone number shall be the total number of Invisible RZones, Open RZones and Complete RZones. Bytes 2 and 3 - First Open RZone number This field shall specify the first Open RZone number. If there is no first Open RZone, this field shall be set to (00). Bytes 4 and 5 - Second Open RZone number This field shall specify the second Open RZone number. If there is no second Open RZone, this field shall be set to (00). Bytes 6 and 7 - Third Open RZone number This field shall specify the third Open RZone number. If there is no third Open RZone, this field shall be set to (00). Bytes 8 to 15 These bytes shall be set to (00). Bytes 16 to 19, 24 to 27,..., 2 040 to 2 043 - Start sector number of RZone No.n (n = 1, 2,..., 254) The first byte of each field shall specify the Layer information for the Start sector number of RZone, and each byte shall be assigned according to the following rule; (00): The following 3 bytes specify the Start sector number for Layer 0 (FF): The following 3 bytes specify the Start sector number for Layer 1 Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. The second to the fourth bytes of each field shall specify the start sector numbers of the RZones. If these fields are set to (00), there is no RZone for this RZone number.

© Ecma International 2010

107

Bytes 20 to 23, 28 to 31,... , 2 044 to 2 047 - Last recorded address of RZone No.n (n = 1, 2,... , 254) The first byte of each field shall specify the Layer information for the Last recorded address of RZone, and each byte shall be assigned according to the following rule; (00): The following 3 bytes specify the Last recorded address for Layer 0 (FF): The following 3 bytes specify the Last recorded address for Layer 1 Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. The second to the fourth bytes of each field shall specify the last recorded sector numbers of the RZones. If the second to fourth bytes of this field are set to (00), then this field is invalid. 28.3.2.1.6 Format1 RMD Field5 to RMD Field12 Format1 RMD Field5 to RMD Field12 shall specify the information of the RZone and the contents of this field shall be as specified in Table 44. If these fields are not used, they shall all be set to (00). Table 44 — Format1 RMD Field5 to RMD Field12 BP

Contents

Number of bytes

0 to 3

Start sector number of the RZone No.n

4

4 to 7

Last recorded address of the RZone No.n

4

8 to 11

Start sector number of the RZone No.n+1

4

Last recorded address of the RZone No.n+1

4

12 to 15 : :

: :

: :

2 044 to 2 047

Last recorded address of the RZone No.n+255

4

Each No.n of Format1 RMD Field5 to RMD Field12 shall be as follows: Format1 RMD Field5

: No.n = 255

Format1 RMD Field6

: No.n = 511

Format1 RMD Field7

: No.n = 767

Format1 RMD Field8

: No.n = 1 023

Format1 RMD Field9

: No.n = 1 279

Format1 RMD Field10

: No.n = 1 535

Format1 RMD Field11

: No.n = 1 791

Format1 RMD Field12

: No.n = 2 047

28.3.2.1.7 Format1 RMD Field13 Format1 RMD Field13 is available for specifying drive specific information.

108

© Ecma International 2010

In Format RMD Field13, it is possible to record drive specific information for up to 8 recorders as shown in Table 45. Each recorder may be single recorder or coexisting recorder in system. This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of Format1 RMD Field13 except Recorded RMA address fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, the contents of the other fields shall be ignored in interchange. The unused field in Format1 RMD Field13 shall be set to (00). Table 45 — Format1 RMD Field13 BP

Contents

Number of bytes

0 to 31

Drive manufacturer ID

32

32 to 47

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

64 to 66

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

67 to 127

Drive specific data

61

128 to 159

Drive manufacturer ID

32

160 to 175

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

192 to 194

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

195 to 255

Drive specific data

61

256 to 287

Drive manufacturer ID

32

288 to 303

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

320 to 322

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

323 to 383

Drive specific data

61

384 to 415

Drive manufacturer ID

32

416 to 431

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

448 to 450

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

451 to 511

Drive specific data

61

512 to 543

Drive manufacturer ID

32

544 to 559

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

576 to 578

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

579 to 639

Drive specific data

61

640 to 671

Drive manufacturer ID

32

Serial Number

16

688 to 703

Model Number

16

704 to 706

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

48 to 63

176 to 191

304 to 319

432 to 447

560 to 575

No. A

No. B

No. C

No. D

No. E

672 to 687 No. F

© Ecma International 2010

109

Table 45 — Format1 RMD Field13 (concluded) BP

Contents

Number of bytes

707 to 767

Drive specific data

61

768 to 799

Drive manufacturer ID

32

800 to 815

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

832 to 834

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

835 to 895

Drive specific data

61

896 to 927

Drive manufacturer ID

32

928 to 943

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

960 to 962

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

963 to 1 023

Drive specific data

61

816 to 831

944 to 959

1 024 to 2 047

No. G

No. H

No. A

Additional drive specific information for recorder No. A

1 024

Bytes 64 to 66, 192 to 194, 320 to 322, 448 to 450, 576 to 578, 704 to 706, 832 to 834, 960 to 962 Recorded RMA address These bytes shall specify the stating RMA address which is used to record RMD including the information of specific recorder for the time. The RMA address of regarding RMD shall be specified in ECC Block address. 28.3.2.1.8 Format1 RMD Field14 Format1 RMD Field14 shall specify versatile information of a disk and drive. The contents of this field shall be shown as in Table 46. Table 46 — Format1 RMD Field14 BP

Contents

Number of bytes

0

Flexible Outer Disk Testing Area flag

1

1 to 4

Testing address of flexible Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 0

4

5 to 8

Testing address of flexible Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 1

4

9 to 12

Testing address of Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 0

4

13 to 16

Testing address of Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 1

4

17 to 20

Testing address of Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 0

4

21 to 24

Testing address of Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 1

4

25 to 28

Testing address of optional Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 1

4

29 to 2 047

Set to (00)

2 019

Byte 0 - Flexible Outer Disk Testing Area flag This field shall specify whether the flexible Outer Disk Testing Area is applied or not.

110

© Ecma International 2010

This flag shall be assigned according to the following rule; 0000 0000:

flexible Outer Disk Testing Area is not applied.

0000 0010:

flexible Outer Disk Testing Area is applied.

Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Bytes 1 to 4 - Testing address of flexible Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 0 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of the flexible Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 0 where the latest calibration was performed. Bytes 5 to 8 - Testing address of flexible Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of the flexible Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 where the latest calibration was performed. Bytes 9 to 12 - Testing address of Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 0 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 0 where the latest calibration was performed. Bytes 13 to 16 - Testing address of Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 where the latest calibration was performed. Bytes 17 to 20 - Testing address of Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 0 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 0 where the latest calibration was performed. Bytes 21 to 24 - Testing address of Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 where the latest calibration was performed. Bytes 25 to 28 - Testing address of optional Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of optional Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 where the latest calibration was performed. Bytes 29 to 2 047 These bytes shall be set to (00). 28.3.2.2

Format4 RMD

28.3.2.2.1 Format4 RMD Field0 Format4 RMD Field0 shall specify general information of the disk and the contents of this field shall be as specified in Table 47.

© Ecma International 2010

111

Table 47 — Format4 RMD Field0 BP

Contents

Number of bytes

0 and 1 2

RMD format Disk status

2 1

3

Set to (00)

1

4 to 21

Unique Disk ID

18

22 to 85

Copy of Pre-pit Information

64

86 to 89

Start sector number of the shifted Middle Zone

4

90

Pre-recorded information code

1

91

Set to (00)

1

92 to 95

End address of pre-recorded Lead-in Zone

4

96 to 99

End address of pre-recorded Middle Zone on Layer 0

4

100 to 103

Start address of pre-recorded Middle Zone on Layer 1

4

104 to 107

Start address of pre-recorded Lead-out Zone

86 to 2 047

Set to (00)

4 1 940

Bytes 0 and 1 - RMD format These bytes shall be set to (0004). Byte 2 - Disk status This field shall specify the disk status as follows: If set to (00), they specify that the disk is empty. If set to (01), they specify that the disk is in Disk at once recording mode. If set to (02), they specify that the disk is in Incremental recording mode. If set to (03), they specify that the disk is a finalized disk in the case of Incremental recording mode. Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Byte 3 This byte shall be set to (00). Byte 4 to byte 21- Unique Disk ID This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these 18 bytes. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Byte 22 to byte 85 - Copy of Pre-pit Information The copy of Pre-pit Information that is specified in 27.3 shall be recorded in this field. The recording format shall be as shown in Table 48.

112

© Ecma International 2010

Table 48 — Copy of Pre-pit Information BP

Contents

22

Field ID set to (01)

23

Application code

24

Disk physical code

25 to 27

Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0

28

Part Version

29

Set to (00)

30

Field ID set to (02)

31 to 32

Set to (00)

33 to 35

Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1

36 to 37

Set to (00)

38

Field ID set to (03)

39 to 44

1st field of Manufacturer ID

45

Set to (00)

46

Field ID set to (04)

47 to 52

2nd field of Manufacturer ID

53

Set to (00)

54

Field ID set to (05)

55 to 85

Set to (00)

Extension code

Byte 86 to byte 89 - Start sector number of the shifted Middle Zone These bytes shall specify the Start sector number of the shifted Middle Zone when the shifted Middle Zone is applied. If the shifted Middle Zone is not applied, these bytes shall be set to (00). Byte 90 - Pre-recorded information code This byte shall specify the pre-recorded area on a disk. The areas specified in Table 49 can be pre-recorded by a disk manufacturer or a recording device and assigned according to the following rule. In Finalization state, the contents of all fields relating to Pre-recorded information (Byte 90, Bytes 92 to 107) are invalid. Bit b0 shall be set to ZERO to indicate Control Data Zone is pre-recorded. Bit b1 shall be set to indicate the pre-recording status of Lead-in Zone. Bit b1 shall be set to ZERO when Lead-in Zone is not pre-recorded. Bit b1 shall be set to ONE when Lead-in Zone is pre-recorded. Bit b2 shall be set to indicate the pre-recording status of Middle Zone. Bit b2 shall be set to ZERO when Middle Zone is not pre-recorded. Bit b2 shall be set to ONE when Middle Zone is pre-recorded. Bit b3 shall be set to indicate the pre-recording status of Lead-out Zone.

© Ecma International 2010

113

Bit b3 shall be set to ZERO when Lead-out Zone is not pre-recorded. Bit b3 shall be set to ONE when Lead-out Zone is pre-recorded. Bits b4 to b7 shall be set to ZERO. Table 49 — Pre-recorded areas Areas which can be pre-recorded

ECC Block address

Lead-in Zone except Extra Border Zone and R-Physical format information zone

(FFDBBB) to (FFD000) (without NBCA) (FFD2A4) to (FFD000) (with NBCA)

Middle Zone

X-8 to (FDCF6D) and (023573) to X  8 (for a 120 mm disk) X-8 to (FF2F22) and (00D4D6) to X  8 (for an 80 mm disk)

Lead-out Zone

Y-33 to (002942) (without NBCA) Y-33 to (002F99) (with NBCA)

NOTE 1 X is the Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 specified in the pre-pit information for Pre-pit data block of Field ID1. See 27.3.5. NOTE 2 Y is the Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 1 specified in the pre-pit information for Pre-pit data block of Field ID2. See 27.3.6.

Byte 91 This byte shall be set to (00). Bytes 92 to 95 - End address of pre-recorded Lead-in Zone These bytes shall specify the end ECC Block address of the pre-recorded Lead-in Zone. When Bit b1 of Byte 40 in the Pre-recorded Physical format information is set to ONE, no pre-recording of the Lead-in Zone by a recording device shall be permitted. See 25.1.6.1. When Bit b1 of Byte 40 in the Pre-recorded Physical format information is set to ZERO, a recording device can pre-record the Lead-in Zone. Bytes 96 to 99 - End address of pre-recorded Middle Zone on Layer 0 These bytes shall specify the end ECC Block address of the pre-recorded Middle Zone on Layer 0. Bytes 100 to 103 - Start address of pre-recorded Middle Zone on Layer 1 These bytes shall specify the start ECC Block address of the pre-recorded Middle Zone on Layer 1. Bytes 104 to 107 - Start address of pre-recorded Lead-out Zone These bytes shall specify the start ECC Block address of the pre-recorded Lead-out Zone. When Bit b3 of Byte 49 in the Pre-recorded Physical format information is set to ONE, no pre-recording of the Lead-out Zone by a recording device shall be permitted. See 25.1.6.1.

114

© Ecma International 2010

When Bit b3 of Byte 40 in the Pre-recorded Physical format information is set to ZERO, a recording device can pre-record the Lead-out Zone. Bytes 108 to 2 047 These bytes shall be set to (00). 28.3.2.2.2 Format4 RMD Field1 Format4 RMD Field1 shall contain OPC related information. In Format4 RMD Field1 it is possible to record OPC related information for up to 4 drives that may coexist in a system. See Table 50. In the case of a single drive system, OPC related information shall be recorded in field No.1 and the other fields shall be set to (00). In every case, the unused fields of Format4 RMD Field1 shall be set to (00).

© Ecma International 2010

115

Table 50 — Format4 RMD Field1 BP 0 to 31 32 to 47 48 to 63 64 to 79 80 to 83 84 to 91 92 to 95 96 to 107 108 to 123 124 to 125 126 to 127 128 to 159 160 to 175 176 to 191 192 to 207 208 to 211 212 to 219 220 to 213 224 to 235 236 to 251 252 to 253 254 to 255 256 to 287 288 to 303 304 to 319 320 to 335 336 to 339 340 to 347 348 to 351 352 to 363 364 to 379 380 to 381 382 to 383 384 to 415 416 to 431 432 to 447 448 to 463 464 to 467 468 to 475 476 to 479 480 to 491 492 to 507 508 to 509 510 to 511 512 to 2 047

116

Contents No. 1

No.2

No.3

No.4

Set to (00)

Drive manufacturer ID Serial number Model number 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0 Recording power Time stamp Power calibration address Running OPC information 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1 DSV Set to (00) Drive manufacturer ID Serial number Model number 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0 Recording power Time stamp Power calibration address Running OPC information 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1 DSV Set to (00) Drive manufacturer ID Serial number Model number 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0 Recording power Time stamp Power calibration address Running OPC information 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1 DSV Set to (00) Drive manufacturer ID Serial number Model number 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0 Recording power Time stamp Power calibration address Running OPC information 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1 DSV Set to (00)

Number of bytes 32 16 16 16 4 8 4 12 16 2 2 32 16 16 16 4 8 4 12 16 2 2 32 16 16 16 4 8 4 12 16 2 2 32 16 16 16 4 8 4 12 16 2 2 1 536

© Ecma International 2010

Bytes 0 to 31, 128 to 159, 256 to 287, 384 to 415 - Drive manufacturer ID This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 32 to 47, 160 to 175, 288 to 303, 416 to 431 - Serial number This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 48 to 63, 176 to 191, 304 to 319, 432 to 447 - Model number This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 64 to 79, 192 to 207, 320 to 335, 448 to 463 - 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0 These fields shall specify the 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 0 in the Extended pre-recorded data of PFI Field ID6 to ID8. The Write Strategy code shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1.4. Bytes 80 to 83, 208 to 211, 336 to 339, 464 to 467 - Recording power This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 84 to 91, 212 to 219, 340 to 347, 468 to 475 - Time stamp This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 92 to 95, 220 to 223, 348 to 351, 476 to 479 - Power calibration address These fields shall specify the start ECC Block address of the DTA where the last power calibration was performed. If these fields are set to (00), they shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 96 to 107, 224 to 235, 352 to 363, 480 to 491 - Running OPC information This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. Bytes 108 to 123, 236 to 251, 364 to 379, 492 to 507 - 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1 These fields shall specify the 2x-speed Write Strategy code for Layer 1 in the Extended pre-recorded data of PFI Field ID10 to ID12. The Write Strategy code shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1.4. Bytes 124 to 125, 252 to 253, 380 to 381, 508 to 509 - DSV These fields shall specify the last DSV in binary notation when the Incremental recording mode is selected. If these fields are set to (00), they are invalid. b15 b7

b14 b6 Initial value

b13 b5

b12

b11 b10 Initial value b4 b3 b2 Next state

b9 b1 T-flag

b8 b0 Set to 0

Figure 66 — DSV field

© Ecma International 2010

117

The first byte and bit b7 to b5 of the second byte shall be used to indicate the initial DSV of the next Incremental recording. This field represents  1023 at the maximum, using 11 bits. See Clause 22. Bit b4 to b2 of the second byte shall be used to indicate the next state of the 16-bit Code word. This field represents 1 to 4 according to the specified state. See Clause 21. Bit b1 of the second byte shall be used to indicate the last bit value in the 16-bit Cord word (ONE or ZERO). ONE represents a space and ZERO represents a recorded mark. The DSV shall be determined from the initial state of the second Sync frame in the Linking Sector of the previous recording. Bytes 116 to 127, 244 to 255, 372 to 383, 500 to 511 These bytes shall be set to (00). Bytes 512 to 2 047 These bytes are reserved for parameters of recording conditions for extended recording speed. Unused fields shall be set to (00). 28.3.2.2.3 Format4 RMD Field2 Format4 RMD Field2 may specify user specific data. If this field is not used, it shall be set to (00). This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of these bytes unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, this content shall be ignored in interchange. 28.3.2.2.4 Format4 RMD Field3 If Multi-Border recordings are performed, then Border Zone information shall be recorded in the Format4 RMD Field3. If the RMD is recorded before the first Border closing or no Borders are recorded, then all fields of Format4 RMD Field3 shall be set to (00) except Bytes 0 to 15. If the Anchor Point is Re-mapped, corresponding fields shall be specified. Table 51 — Format4 RMD Field3 BP

Contents

Number of bytes

0 to 3

Re-mapping ECC block sector number for AP1

4

4 to 7

Re-mapping ECC block sector number for AP2

4

8 to 11

Re-mapping ECC block sector number for AP3

4

12 to 15

Re-mapping ECC block sector number for AP4

4

16 to 31

Set to (00)

16

32 to 35

Start sector number of Border-out No.1

4

36 to 39

Start sector number of Border-out No.2

4

: 2 044 to 2 047

: Start sector number of Border-out No.n

: 4

Bytes 0 to 3, 4 to 7, 8 to 11, 12 to 15 - Re-mapping ECC block sector number for AP No.n (n=1, 2, 3, 4) Re-mapping ECC block sector number for AP No.n (n = 1 to 4) shall specify the start sector number of the ECC block which includes the re-assignment sector to be read when the Anchor Point (AP No.n) is referred.

118

© Ecma International 2010

When the ECC block which includes the AP No.n is referred and the corresponding Re-mapping ECC block sector number for AP No.n is set, recording devices shall refer to the ECC block pointed by this field. When the ECC block which includes the AP No.n is referred and this field is set to (00), recording devices shall refer to the original ECC block specified by the AP No.n. See Annex Q. Byte 32 to 35, 36 to 39…, 2 044 to 2 047 - Start sector number of Border-out No.n (n = 1, 2, …, 504) These fields shall indicate the start sector number of the Border-out. If the field is not used, all bytes in each field shall be set to (00). 28.3.2.2.5 Format4 RMD Field4 Format4 RMD Field4 shall specify the information of RZone and the contents of this field shall be as specified in Table 52. The portion of the Data Recordable Zone that is reserved for recording user data is called the RZone. The RZone shall be divided into 2 types depending on the recording conditions. In an Open RZone, the additional data can be appended. In a Complete RZone, no further user data can be appended. There shall not be more than three Open RZones in a Data Recordable Zone. The portion of the Data Recordable Zone that is not yet reserved for recording data is called the Invisible RZone. The zones for subsequent RZones can be reserved in the Invisible RZone. If no further data can be appended, no Invisible RZone exists. Table 52 — Format4 RMD Field4 BP

Contents

Number of bytes

0 to 1

Invisible RZone number

2

2 to 3

First Open RZone number

2

4 to 5

Second Open RZone number

2

6 to 7

Third Open RZone number

2

8 to 15

Set to (00)

8

16 to 19

Start sector number of Invisible RZone

4

20 to 23

Layer jump address of Invisible RZone

4

24 to 27

End sector number of Invisible RZone

4

28 to 31

Last recorded address of Invisible RZone

4

32 to 35

Previous layer jump address of Invisible RZone

4

36 to 37

Jump interval

2

38 to 47

Set to (00)

10

48 to 51

Start sector number of RZone No.1

4

52 to 55

Layer Jump address of RZone No.1

4

56 to 59

End sector number of RZone No.1

4

60 to 63

Last recorded address of RZone No.1

4

64 to 67

Start sector number of RZone No.2

4

© Ecma International 2010

119

Table 52 — Format4 RMD Field4 (concluded) BP

Contents

Number of bytes

68 to 71

Layer Jump address of RZone No.2

4

72 to 75

End sector number of RZone No.2

4

76 to 79

Last recorded address of RZone No.2

4

:

:

:

2 032 to 2 035

Start sector number of RZone No.125

4

2 036 to 2 039

Layer Jump address of RZone No.125

4

2 040 to 2 043

End sector number of RZone No.125

4

2 044 to 2 047

Last recorded address of RZone No.125

4

Bytes 0 and 1 - Invisible RZone number This field shall specify the Invisible RZone number. The Invisible RZone number shall be the total number of Invisible RZones, Open RZones and Complete RZones. Bytes 2 and 3 - First Open RZone number This field shall specify the first Open RZone number. If there is no first Open RZone, this field shall be set to (00). Bytes 4 and 5 - Second Open RZone number This field shall specify the second Open RZone number. If there is no second Open RZone, this field shall be set to (00). Bytes 6 and 7 - Third Open RZone number This field shall specify the third Open RZone number. If there is no third Open RZone, this field shall be set to (00). Bytes 8 to 15 These bytes shall be set to (00). Bytes 16 to 19 - Start sector number of Invisible RZone When the automatic layer jump recording is applied, this field shall specify the Start sector number of Invisible RZone. The first byte of this field shall be set to (00). If the second to fourth bytes of this field are set to (00), then this field is invalid. Bytes 20 to 23 - Layer jump address of Invisible RZone When the automatic layer jump recording is applied, this field shall specify the latest Layer jump address of Invisible RZone.

120

© Ecma International 2010

The first byte of this field shall be set to (00). The second to the fourth bytes of this field shall specify the Layer jump address of the Invisible RZone on Layer 0. A jump destination address (Y) is determined by Layer Jump address (X) described below. Y= X The second to fourth bytes shall be set to (00) for the following cases: -

When no Layer jump address is specified for Invisible RZone, or

-

When Layer jump address is specified and the inner part of the both layers of the Invisible RZone specified by this field is fully recorded.

When Jump interval (Bytes 36 and 37) is specified, this field is specified only by the calculation from the Jump interval. Neither the End sector number of Layer 0 nor the sector number of (Start sector number of the shifted Middle Zone –1) shall be set to this field as a Layer jump address. Bytes 24 to 27 - End sector number of Invisible RZone When the automatic layer jump recording is applied, this field shall specify the End sector number of Invisible RZone. The first byte of this field shall be set to (FF). If the second to fourth bytes of this field are set to (00), then this field is invalid. Bytes 28 to 31 - Last recorded address of Invisible RZone When the automatic layer jump recording is applied, this field shall specify the Last recorded address of Invisible RZone. The first byte of this field shall specify the Layer information for the Last recorded address of Invisible RZone, and the byte shall be assigned according to the following rule; (00):

The following 3 bytes specify the Last recorded address of Layer 0

(FF):

The following 3 bytes specify the Last recorded address of Layer 1

Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. The second to the fourth bytes of this field shall specify the Last recorded address of the Invisible RZone. If the second to fourth bytes of this field are set to (00), then this field is invalid. Bytes 32 to 35 - Previous layer jump address of Invisible RZone When the automatic layer jump recording is applied, this field shall specify the Previous layer jump address of Invisible RZone. The first byte of this field shall be set to (00). The second to the fourth bytes of this field shall specify the Previous layer jump address of the Invisible RZone on Layer 0.

© Ecma International 2010

121

A jump destination address (Y) is determined by Layer Jump address (X) described below. Y= X The initial value of the second to fourth bytes of this field shall be set to (00). When the Layer jump address of Invisible RZone (Bytes 20 to 23) is specified, the value before it changes shall be copied into this field. Bytes BP 36 and 37 - Jump interval When the automatic layer jump recording is applied, this field shall specify the Jump interval width except BSGA (Block Sync Guard Area). This size specifies the number of ECC blocks of Layer 1. This field can be specified when both of this field and the Layer jump address of Invisible RZone field (Bytes 20 to 23) are set to (00) and the Invisible RZone is blank. Bytes 38 to 47 These bytes shall be set to (00). Bytes 48 to 51, 64 to 67, ..., 2 032 to 2 035 - Start sector number of RZone No.n (n = 1, 2, ..., 125) The first byte of each field shall specify the Layer information for the Start sector number of RZone, and each byte shall be assigned according to the following rule; (00): The following 3 bytes specify the Start sector number for Layer 0 (FF): The following 3 bytes specify the Start sector number for Layer 1 Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. The second to the fourth bytes of each field shall specify the start sector numbers of the RZones. If these fields are set to (00), there is no RZone for this RZone number. Bytes 52 to 55, 68 to 71, …, 2 036 to 2 039 - Layer Jump address of RZone No.n (n = 1, 2, …, 125) The first byte of each field shall be set to (00). The second to the fourth bytes of each field shall specify the jump address of the RZones on Layer 0. The jump destination address (Y) is determined by Layer Jump address (X) described below. Y= X If the second to fourth bytes of this field are set to (00), then this field is invalid. Bytes 56 to 59, 72 to 75, …, 2 040 to 2 043 - End sector number of RZone No.n (n = 1, 2, …, 125) The first byte of each field shall specify the Layer information for the End sector number of RZone, and each byte shall be assigned according to the following rule; (00):

The following 3 bytes specify the End sector number of Layer 0

(FF):

The following 3 bytes specify the End sector number of Layer 1

Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. The second to the fourth bytes of each field shall specify the end sector numbers of the RZones.

122

© Ecma International 2010

If the second to fourth bytes of this field are set to (00), then this field is invalid. Bytes 60 to 63, 76 to 79, ..., 2 044 to 2 047 - Last recorded address of RZone No.n (n = 1, 2,... , 254) The first byte of each field shall specify the Layer information for the Last recorded address of RZone, and each byte shall be assigned according to the following rule; (00): The following 3 bytes specify the Last recorded address for Layer 0 (FF): The following 3 bytes specify the Last recorded address for Layer 1 Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. The second to the fourth bytes of each field shall specify the last recorded sector numbers of the RZones. If the second to fourth bytes of this field are set to (00), then this field is invalid. 28.3.2.2.6 Format4 RMD Field5 to RMD Field12 Format4 RMD Field5 to RMD Field12 shall specify the information of the RZone and the contents of this field shall be as specified in Table 53. If these fields are not used, they shall all be set to (00). Table 53 — Format4 RMD Field5 to RMD Field12 BP

Contents

Number of bytes

0 to 3

Start sector number of RZone No.n

4

4 to 7

Layer Jump address of RZone No.n

4

8 to 11

End sector number of RZone No.n

4

12 to 15

Last recorded address of RZone No.n

4

16 to 19

Start sector number of RZone No.n+1

4

20 to 23

Layer Jump address of RZone No.n+1

4

24 to 27

End sector number of RZone No.n+1

4

28 to 31

Last recorded address of RZone No.n+1

4

:

:

:

2 032 to 2 035

Start sector number of RZone No.n+127

4

2 036 to 2 039

Layer Jump address of RZone No.n+127

4

2 040 to 2 043

End sector number of RZone No.n+127

4

2 044 to 2 047

Last recorded address of RZone No.n+127

4

Each No.n of Format1 RMD Field5 to RMD Field12 shall be as follows: Format1 RMD Field5

: No.n = 126

Format1 RMD Field6

: No.n = 254

Format1 RMD Field7

: No.n = 382

Format1 RMD Field8

: No.n = 510

© Ecma International 2010

123

Format1 RMD Field9

: No.n = 638

Format1 RMD Field10

: No.n = 766

Format1 RMD Field11

: No.n = 894

Format1 RMD Field12

: No.n = 1 022

28.3.2.2.7 Format4 RMD Field13 Format4 RMD Field13 is available for specifying drive specific information. In Format4 RMD Field13, it is possible to record drive specific information for up to 8 recorders as shown in Table 54. Each recorder may be single recorder or coexisting recorder in system. This Ecma Standard does not specify the content of Format4 RMD Field13 except Recorded RMA address fields. Unless otherwise agreed to by the interchange parties, the contents of the other fields shall be ignored in interchange. The unused field in Format4 RMD Field13 shall be set to (00). Table 54 — Format4 RMD Field13 BP

Contents

Number of bytes

0 to 31

Drive manufacturer ID

32

32 to 47

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

64 to 66

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

67 to 127

Drive specific data

61

128 to 159

Drive manufacturer ID

32

160 to 175

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

192 to 194

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

195 to 255

Drive specific data

61

256 to 287

Drive manufacturer ID

32

288 to 303

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

320 to 322

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

323 to 383

Drive specific data

61

384 to 415

Drive manufacturer ID

32

416 to 431

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

448 to 450

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

451 to 511

Drive specific data

61

Drive manufacturer ID

32

Serial Number

16

48 to 63

176 to 191

304 to 319

432 to 447

No. A

No. B

No. C

No. D

512 to 543 No. E 544 to 559

124

© Ecma International 2010

Table 54 — Format4 RMD Field13 (concluded) BP

Contents

Number of bytes

560 to 575

Model Number

16

576 to 578

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

579 to 639

Drive specific data

61

640 to 671

Drive manufacturer ID

32

672 to 687

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

704 to 706

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

707 to 767

Drive specific data

61

768 to 799

Drive manufacturer ID

32

800 to 815

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

832 to 834

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

835 to 895

Drive specific data

61

896 to 927

Drive manufacturer ID

32

928 to 943

Serial Number

16

Model Number

16

960 to 962

Recorded RMA address (ECC Block address)

3

963 to 1 023

Drive specific data

61

Additional drive specific information for recorder No. A

1 024

688 to 703

816 to 831

944 to 959

1 024 to 2 047

No. F

No. G

No. H

No. A

Bytes 64 to 66, 192 to 194, 320 to 322, 448 to 450, 576 to 578, 704 to 706, 832 to 834, 960 to 962 Recorded RMA address These bytes shall specify the stating RMA address which is used to record RMD including the information of specific recorder for the time. The RMA address of regarding RMD shall be specified in ECC Block address. 28.3.2.2.8 Format4 RMD Field14 Format4 RMD Field14 shall specify versatile information of a disk and drive. The contents of this field shall be shown as in Table 55. Table 55 — Format4 RMD Field14 BP

Contents

Number of bytes

0

Flexible Outer Disk Testing Area flag

1

1 to 4

Testing address of flexible Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 0

4

5 to 8

Testing address of flexible Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 1

4

9 to 12

Testing address of Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 0

4

13 to 16

Testing address of Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 1

4

© Ecma International 2010

125

Table 55 — Format4 RMD Field14 (concluded) BP

Contents

Number of bytes

17 to 20

Testing address of Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 0

4

21 to 24

Testing address of Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 1

4

25 to 28

Testing address of optional Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 1

4

29 to 2 015

Set to (00)

2 016 to 2 017

Start pointer of Blank Area No.1

2

2 018 to 2 019

End pointer of Blank Area No.1

2

2 020 to 2 021

Start pointer of Blank Area No.2

2

2 022 to 2 023

End pointer of Blank Area No.2

2

2 024 to 2 025

Start pointer of Blank Area No.3

2

2 026 to 2 027

End pointer of Blank Area No.3

2

2 028 to 2 029

Start pointer of Blank Area No.4

2

2 030 to 2 031

End pointer of Blank Area No.4

2

2 032 to 2 033

Start pointer of Blank Area No.5

2

2 034 to 2 035

End pointer of Blank Area No.5

2

2 036 to 2 037

Start pointer of Blank Area No.6

2

2 038 to 2 039

End pointer of Blank Area No.6

2

2 040 to 2 041

Start pointer of Blank Area No.7

2

2 042 to 2 043

End pointer of Blank Area No.7

2

2 044 to 2 045

Start pointer of Blank Area No.8

2

2 046 to 2 047

End pointer of Blank Area No.8

2

1 987

Byte 0 - Flexible Outer Disk Testing Area flag This field shall specify whether the flexible Outer Disk Testing Area is applied or not. This flag shall be assigned according to the following rule: 0000 0000:

flexible Outer Disk Testing Area is not applied.

0000 0010:

flexible Outer Disk Testing Area is applied.

Other settings are prohibited by this Ecma Standard. Bytes 1 to 4 - Testing address of flexible Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 0 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of the flexible Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 0 where the latest calibration was performed. Bytes 5 to 8 - Testing address of flexible Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of the flexible Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 where the latest calibration was performed.

126

© Ecma International 2010

Bytes 9 to 12 - Testing address of Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 0 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 0 where the latest calibration was performed. Bytes 13 to 16 - Testing address of Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 where the latest calibration was performed. Bytes 17 to 20 - Testing address of Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 0 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 0 where the latest calibration was performed. Bytes 21 to 24 - Testing address of Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of Outer Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 where the latest calibration was performed. Bytes 25 to 28 - Testing address of optional Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 This field shall specify the start ECC Block address of optional Inner Disk Testing Area on Layer 1 where the latest calibration was performed. Bytes 29 to 2 015 These bytes shall be set to (00). Bytes 2 016 to 2 017, 2 020 to 2 021, 2 024 to 2 025, 2 028 to 2 029, 2 032 to 2 033, 2 036 to 2 037, 2 040 to 2 041, 2 044 to 2 045 - Start pointer of Blank Area No.n (n = 1 to 8) This field shall specify a start pointer of a Blank Area by a related RZone number. The Blank Area is appeared in previous adjacent area on Layer 1 of the related RZone to keep the Recording order. See Annex O. Start pointer is obtained from End sector number of the related RZone. After Blank Area is recorded, corresponding Start pointer field shall be set to (00) and sorted by the related RZone number specified a start pointer of a Blank Area from Byte 2 016 to Byte 2 045 in ascending order. Bytes 2 018 to 2 019, 2 022 to 2 023, 2 026 to 2 027, 2 030 to 2 031, 2 034 to 2 035, 2 038 to 2 039, 2 042 to 2 043, 2 046 to 2 047 - End pointer of Blank Area No.n (n = 1 to 8) This field shall specify an end pointer of a Blank Area by a related RZone number. The Blank Area is appeared in next adjacent area on Layer 1 of the related RZone to keep the Recording order. See Annex O. End pointer is obtained from Layer Jump address of the related RZone. After Blank Area is recorded, corresponding End pointer field shall be set to (00).

© Ecma International 2010

127

128

© Ecma International 2010

Annex A (normative) Measurement of the angular deviation 

The angular deviation is the angle  formed by an incident beam perpendicular to the Reference Plane P with the reflected beam. See Figure A.1.

Recorded layer

Substrate Entrance surface α

P

Incident beam

Reflected beam

96-0302-A

Figure A.1 — Angular deviation  For measuring the angular deviation , the disk shall be clamped between two concentric rings covering most of the Clamping Zone. The top clamping area shall have the same diameters as the bottom clamping area. + 0,5 mm

d in = 22,3 mm

- 0,0 mm

+ 0,0 mm

d out = 32,7 mm - 0,5 mm

The total clamping force shall be F 1 = 2,0 N  0,5 N. In order to prevent warping of the disk under the moment of force generated by the clamping force and the chucking force F2 exerted on the rim of the centre hole of the disk, F 2 shall not exceed 0,5 N. See Figure A.2. This measurement shall be made under the conditions of 8.1.1.a).

© Ecma International 2010

129

dout din

F1

15,00 mm min.

F1

F2 97-0006-A

Figure A.2 — Clamping and chucking conditions

130

© Ecma International 2010

Annex B (normative) Measurement of birefringence

B.1 Principle of the measurement In order to measure the birefringence, circularly polarized light in a parallel beam is used. The phase retardation is measured by observing the ellipticity of the reflected light.

a

b

θ radial direction

Figure B.1 — Ellipse with ellipticity e = b/a and orientation  The orientation θ of the ellipse is determined by the orientation of the optical axis θ =  - π/4

(I)

where  is the angle between the optical axis and the radial direction. The ellipticity e = b/a is a function of the phase retardation δ

1  π  e = tan    δ   2  2

(II)

When the phase retardation δ is known the birefringence BR can be expressed as a fraction of the wavelength BR =

λ δ nm 2π

(III)

Thus, by observing the elliptically polarized light reflected from the disk, the birefringence can be measured and the orientation of the optical axis can be assessed as well.

© Ecma International 2010

131

B.2 Measurements conditions The measurement of the birefringence specified above shall be made under the following conditions: Mode of measurement in reflection, double pass through the substrate Wavelength λ of the laser light

640 nm  15 nm

Beam diameter (FWHM)

1,0 mm  0,2 mm

Angle  of incidence in radial direction relative to the radial plane perpendicular to Reference Plane P

7,0  0,2

Clamping and chucking conditions

as specified by Annex A

Disk mounting

horizontally

Rotation

less than 1 Hz

Temperature and relative humidity

as specified in 8.1.1 b)

B.3 Example of a measuring set-up Whilst this Ecma Standard does not prescribe a specific device for measuring birefringence, the device shown schematically in Figure B.2 as an example, is well suited for this measurement.

Laser

Photo detector

Polarizer

Collimator lens

λ/4Plate

Rotating analyser

β Disk

Figure B.2 — Example of a device for the measurement of birefringence -5

Light from a laser source, collimated into a polarizer ( extinction ratio  10 ), is made circular by a λ/4 plate. The ellipticity of the reflected light is analyzed by a rotating analyzer and a photo detector. For every location on the disk, the minimum and the maximum values of the intensity are measured. The ellipticity can then be calculated as e2 = Imin / Imax

(IV)

Combining equations II, III and IV yields

132

© Ecma International 2010

BR 

I λ λ  arctan min 4 π Imax

This device can be easily calibrated as follows: 

Imin is set to 0 by measuring a polarizer or a λ/ 4 plate,

Imin = Imax when measuring a mirror.

Apart of the d.c. contribution of the front surface reflection, a.c. components may occur, due to the interference of the reflection(s) of the front surface with the reflection(s) from the recorded layer. These a.c. reflectance effects are significant only if the disk substrate has an extremely accurate flatness and if the light source has a high coherence.

© Ecma International 2010

133

134

© Ecma International 2010

Annex C (normative) Measurement of the differential phase tracking error

C.1 Measuring method for the differential phase tracking error The reference circuit for the measurement of the tracking error shall be that shown in Figure C.1. Each output of the diagonal pairs of elements of the quadrant photo detector shall be digitized independently after equalization of the waveform defined by H(s) = (1 + 1,6  10-7 i ) / (1 + 4,7  10-8 i ) The gain of the comparators shall be sufficient to reach full saturation on the outputs, even with minimum signal amplitudes. Phases of the digitized pulse signal edges (signals B 1 and B2) shall be compared to each other to produce a time-lead signal C1 and a time-lag signal C2. The phase comparator shall react to each individual edge with signal C1 or C2, depending on the sign of ti. A tracking error signal shall be produced by smoothing the C1, C2 signals with low-pass filters and by subtracting by means of a unity gain differential amplifier. The low-pass filters shall be 1st order filters with a cut-off frequency of (-3 dB) 30 kHz. Special attention shall be given to the implementation of the circuit because very small time differences have to be measured, indeed 1 % of T equals only 0,38 ns. Careful averaging is needed. The average time difference between two signals from the diagonal pairs of elements of the quadrant detector shall be

t = 1/N ti where N is the number of edges both rising and falling.

C.2 Measurement of Δt /T without time interval analyzer The relative time difference Δt /T is represented by the amplitude of the tracking error signal provided that the amplitudes of the C1 and C2 signals and the frequency component of the read-out signals are normalized. The relation between the tracking error amplitude TVE and the time difference is given by

TVE 

 ti Vpc   ti Vpc  t  Vpc NnT T n Ti

where Vpc is the amplitude of the C1 and C2 signals Ti is the actual length of the read-out signal in the range 3T to 14T nT is the weighted average value of the actual lengths N n T is the total averaging time

© Ecma International 2010

135

Assuming that Vpc equals  5 V and that the measured value of n equals  5, then the above relation between the tracking error amplitude TVE and the time difference t can be simplified to

TVE = t / T The specification for the tracking gain can now be rewritten by using the tracking error amplitude as follows: 0,5 (Vpc/n)  TVE  1,1 (Vpc/n) at 0,1 m radial offset.

C.3 Calibration of Δt /T As the gain of the phase comparator tends to vary, special attention shall be given to the calibration of the gain of the phase comparator. The following check and calibration method shall be applied for the measurement of the DPD tracking error signal. a)

b)

Checking the measurement circuit a.1)

Measure the relation between the amplitude of the first comparator input (3T) and the amplitude of the tracking error signal.

a.2)

Check the current gain of the amplifier, using the saturation area (see Figure C.2).

Determination of the calibration factor K b.1)

Generate two sinusoidal signals A1 and A2 of frequency 2,616 MHz (corresponding to 5T) with phase difference, and feed them into two equalizer circuits.

b.2)

Measure the relation between t /T and TVE / Vpc.

( TVE / Vpc) K = ( t / T) / n K = (0,2 t /T) / ( TVE / Vpc) for n = 5 The relation between t /T and TVE / Vpc is linear (see Figure C.3). c)

Compare the measured t /T with the calculated one c.1)

Measure t /T using the method of C.1.

c.2)

Calculate t /T(real) as follows:

t /T (real) = K  Δt /T (measured)

136

© Ecma International 2010

Amp. Ia

Ib

Id

Ic Amp.

Signal A1

Signal A2

Signal C1 Low-pass

Comparator

Equalizer H(S)

Comparator

Level

Differential amplifier

1

Comparator

Signal B2

Level

Filter

Phase

Signal B1

Equalizer H(S)

Signal TVE ΔTVE

Signal C2 Low-pass

Filter 0,1 μm tracking error

Δti = positive

Signal A1

Δti = negative

Ti

Signal A2

Signal B1

Signal B2

Signal C1 Signal C2

Vpc

Vpc

Figure C.1 — Circuit for tracking error measurements

© Ecma International 2010

137

saturation area

Amplitude of the tracking error

0 0

Comparator input signal amplitude

Figure C.2 — Comparator input signal amplitude vs. tracking error signal amplitude

theoretical line 1,0

0,8 ΔTVE 0,6 Vpc

0,4 0,2 0 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Δt/T

Figure C.3 — Δt /T vs. ΔTVE / Vpc

138

© Ecma International 2010

Annex D (normative) Measurement of light reflectance

D.1 Calibration method A good reference disk shall be chosen, for instance 0,6 mm glass disk with a golden reflective mirror. This reference disk shall be measured by a parallel beam as shown in Figure D.1

Rint Rs r

r

R

I

Figure D.1 — Reflectance calibration In this Figure the following applies: I

= incident beam

r

= reflectance of the entrance surface

Rs = main reflectance of the recorded layer Rint = other reflectances of the entrance surface and of the recorded layer R// = measured value, using the arrangement of Figure D.1.

R// = r + Rs + Rint r =  (n-1) / (n+1) )2 where n is the refraction index of the substrate Rs = R// - r -Rint Rs =  (1-r)2  (R// - r) /  1-r  (2 - R//) The reference disk shall be measured on a reference drive and Imirror measured by the focused beam is equated to Rs as determined above.

© Ecma International 2010

139

Now the arrangement is calibrated and the focused reflectivity is a linear function of the reflectivity of the recorded layer, independently from the reflectivity of the entrance surface.

D.2 Measuring method The measuring method comprises the following steps: Measure the reflective light power Ds from the reference disk with calibrated reflectivity Rs Measure I14H in the Information Zone of the disk (see 13.3) Calculate the reflectivity as follows:

I R14H  Rs  14H Ds

140

© Ecma International 2010

Annex E (normative) Tapered cone for disk clamping

The device used for centring the disk for measurement shall be a cone with a taper angle  = 40,0± 0,5° (see Figure E.1).

Entrance surface

β

Figure E.1 — Tapered cone

© Ecma International 2010

141

142

© Ecma International 2010

Annex F (normative) Measurement of jitter

Jitter shall be measured under the conditions of 9.1 with the additional conditions specified in this Annex.

F.1 System diagram for jitter measurement The general system diagram for jitter measurement shall be as shown in Figure F.1.

HF-signal

Pre-amp. AC-coupling

EQ

Quadrant photo detector

Slicer All data edges

LPF

Phase detector, Filter, VCO

8-16 demodulator, Error corrector, Sector decoder

PLL

Decoder

Clock signal

Jitter analyse (e.g. a Time Interval Analyser)

Start / stop signal From revolution pulse

TIA 01-0117-A

Figure F.1 — General diagram for jitter measurement

© Ecma International 2010

143

F.2 Open loop transfer function for PLL The open-loop transfer function for the PLL shown in Figure F.1 shall be as shown in Figure F.2.

Gain (dB)

-40 dB/decade

-20 dB/decade

0 dB 6000

9000

Frequency (Hz)

Figure F.2 — Schematic representation of the open-loop transfer function for PLL

F.3 Slicer The slicer shall be a feed-back auto-slicer with a -3 dB closed-loop bandwidth of 5 kHz, 1st order integrating.

F.4 Conditions for measurement The bandwidth of the pre-amplifier of the photo detector shall be greater than 20 MHz in order to prevent group-delay distortion (See Figure F.3). Low-pass filter: 6th order Bessel filter, c (-3 dB) = 8,2 MHz Example of an analogue equalizer: 3-tap transversal filter with transfer function -2,093

H(z) =1,35 z

-4,186

- 0,175 (1 + z

)

Filtering and equalization: - Gain variation: 1 dB max. (below 7 MHz) - Group delay variation: 3 ns max. (below 6,5 MHz) - (Gain at 5,0 MHz - Gain at 0 Hz) = 3,2 dB  0,3 dB a.c. coupling (high-pass filter) = 1st order, c (-3 dB) = 1 kHz Correction of the angular deviation: only d.c. deviation.

144

© Ecma International 2010

Gain (dB) 6

4

2

0

-2

-4 EQ only -6

LPF only EQ +LPF

-8

-10 0

2

4

6

8

10

Frequency (MHz)

Figure F.3 — Frequency characteristics for the equalizer and the low-pass filter

F.5 Measurement The jitter of all leading and trailing edges over one rotation shall be measured. Under this measurement, the jitter shall be less than 8,0 % of the Channel bit clock period.

© Ecma International 2010

145

146

© Ecma International 2010

Annex G (normative) 8-to-16 Modulation with RLL (2,10) requirements

Tables G.1 and G.2 list the 16-bit Code Words into which the 8-bit coded Data bytes have to be transformed. Figure G.1 shows schematically how the Code Words and the associated State specification are generated.

8-bit Byte B(t)

16-bit Code Word X(t)

Conversion table Next State

State S(t)

S(t+1)

Memory

Figure G.1 — Code Words generation In this Figure: X(t) = H{B(t), S(t)} S(t+1) =G{B(t), S(t)} H is the output function G is the next-state function

X 15 (t) = msb and X 0 (t) = lsb

The Code Words leaving the States shall be chosen so that the concatenation of Code Words entering a State and those leaving that State satisfy the requirement that between two ONEs there shall be at least 2 and at most 10 ZEROs. As additional requirements:  Code Words leaving State 2 shall have both bit x 15 and bit x 3 set to ZERO, and  in Code Words leaving State 3 bit x 15 or bit x 3 or both shall be set to ONE. This means that the Code Word sets of States 2 and 3 are disjoint.

© Ecma International 2010

147

Code Word X(t)

Next State S(t+1)

Code Word X(t+1)

Ends with 1 or no trailing ZERO

State 1

Starts with 2 or up to 9 leading ZEROs

Ends with 2 or up to 5 trailing ZEROs

State 2

Starts with 1 or up to 5 leading ZEROs, and X 15 (t+1),X 3 (t+1) = 0,0

Ends with 2 or up to 5 trailing ZEROs

State 3

Starts with none or up to 5 leading ZEROs, and X 15 (t+1),X 3 (t+1)  0,0

Ends with 6 or up to 9 trailing ZEROs

State 4

Starts with 1 or no leading ZERO

Figure G.2 — Determination of States Note that when decoding the recorded data, knowledge about the encoder is required to be able to reconstitute the original main Data.

B(t) = H -1 {X(t), S(t)}

Because of the involved error propagation, such state -dependent decoding is to be avoided. In the case of this 8-to-16 modulation, the conversion Tables have been chosen in such a way that knowledge about the State is not required in most cases. As can be gathered from the Tables, in some cases, two 8-bit bytes, for instance the 8-bit bytes 5 and 6 in States 1 and 2 in Table G.1, generate the same 16-bit Code Words. The construction of the Tables allows to solve this apparent ambiguity. Indeed, if two identical Code Words leave a State, one of them goes to State 2 and the other to State 3. Because the setting of bits X 15 and X 3 is always different in these two States, any Code Word can be uniquely decoded by analysing the Code Word itself together with bits X 15 and X 3 of the next Code Word:

B(t) = H -1 { X(t), X 15 (t+1), X 3 (t+1) }

In the Tables, the 8-bit bytes are identified by their decimal value.

148

© Ecma International 2010

Table G.1 — Main Conversion Table 8-bit byte

State 1 State 2 Code Word Next Code Word msb lsb State msb lsb

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45

0010000000001001 0010000000010010 0010000100100000 0010000001001000 0010000010010000 0010000000100100 0010000000100100 0010000001001000 0010000010010000 0010000100100000 0010010010000000 0010001001000000 0010010010000001 0010001001000001 0010000001001001 0010000100100001 0010000010010001 0010000000100010 0001000000001001 0010000000010001 0001000000010010 0000100000000010 0000010000000001 0010001000100000 0010000100010000 0010000010001000 0010000001000100 0001000100100000 0010000000001000 0001000010010000 0001000001001000 0001000000100100 0001000000000100 0001000000000100 0001000000100100 0001000001001000 0001000010010000 0001000100100000 0010000000001000 0010000001000100 0010000010001000 0010000100010000 0010001000100000 0010010001000000 0001001001000000 0000001000000001

© Ecma International 2010

1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 1

0100000100100000 0010000000010010 0010000100100000 0100010010000000 0010000010010000 0010000000100100 0010000000100100 0100000000010010 0010000010010000 0010000100100000 0010010010000000 0010001001000000 0010010010000001 0010001001000001 0100000000100100 0010000100100001 0010000010010001 0010000000100010 0100000010010000 0010000000010001 0001000000010010 0000100000000010 0000010000000001 0010001000100000 0010000100010000 0100000000100100 0010000001000100 0001000100100000 0100000010010000 0001000010010000 0100000100100000 0001000000100100 0001000000000100 0001000000000100 0001000000100100 0100001001000000 0001000010010000 0001000100100000 0100100100000001 0010000001000100 0100010010000001 0010000100010000 0010001000100000 0010010001000000 0001001001000000 0100010001000000

Next State

State 3 Code Word msb lsb

2 1 2 4 2 2 3 1 3 3 4 4 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 4 3 3 1 3 1 3 3 4 4 4

0010000000001001 1000000100100000 1000000000010010 0010000001001000 1000000100100000 1001001000000000 1000100100000000 0010000001001000 1000010010000000 1001001000000001 1000100100000001 1000000010010000 1000000010010000 1000010010000001 0010000001001001 1000001001000001 1000000100100001 1000001001000000 0001000000001001 1001000100000000 1000100010000000 1000000010010001 1000000001001001 1000000001001000 1000000001001000 0010000010001000 1000000000100010 1000000000010001 0010000000001000 1001001000000010 0001000001001000 1001000100000001 1000100100000010 1000100010000001 1000000000100100 0001000001001000 1000000000100100 1000010001000000 0010000000001000 1001000010000000 0010000010001000 1000010010000010 1000001000100000 1000010001000001 1000001000100000 1000001001000010

State 4 Next Code Word State msb lsb 1 3 1 2 2 4 4 3 4 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 4 1 4 4 1 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 3 4 3 1 2 1 3 1

0100000100100000 1000000100100000 1000000000010010 0100010010000000 1000000100100000 1001001000000000 1000100100000000 0100000000010010 1000010010000000 1001001000000001 1000100100000001 1000000010010000 1000000010010000 1000010010000001 0100000000100100 1000001001000001 1000000100100001 1000001001000000 0100000010010000 1001000100000000 1000100010000000 1000000010010001 1000000001001001 1000000001001000 1000000001001000 0100000000100100 1000000000100010 1000000000010001 0100000010010000 1001001000000010 0100000100100000 1001000100000001 1000100100000010 1000100010000001 1000000000100100 0100001001000000 1000000000100100 1000010001000000 0100100100000001 1001000010000000 0100010010000001 1000010010000010 1000001000100000 1000010001000001 1000001000100000 0100010001000000

Next State 2 3 1 4 2 4 4 1 4 1 1 3 2 1 3 1 1 4 2 4 4 1 1 2 3 2 1 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 2 4 3 4 1 4 1 1 2 1 3 4

149

Table G.1 — Main Conversion Table (continued) 8-bit byte

State 1 State 2 State 3 State 4 Code Word Next Code Word Next Code Word Next Code Word msb lsb State msb lsb State msb lsb State msb lsb

46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94

0010010010000010 0010000010001001 0010010001000001 0010001001000010 0010001000100001 0001000001001001 0010000100100010 0010000100010001 0010000010010010 0010000001000010 0010000000100001 0000100000001001 0001001001000001 0001000100100001 0001000010010001 0001000000100010 0001000000010001 0000100000010010 0000010000000010 0010010000100000 0010001000010000 0010000100001000 0010000010000100 0010000000010000 0001000010001000 0001001000100000 0001000000001000 0001000100010000 0001000001000100 0000100100100000 0000100010010000 0000100001001000 0000100000100100 0000100000000100 0000100000000100 0000100000100100 0000100001001000 0000100010010000 0000100100100000 0001000000001000 0001000001000100 0001000010001000 0001000100010000 0001001000100000 0010000000010000 0010000010000100 0010000100001000 0010001000010000 0010010000100000

150

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0010010010000010 0100001001000001 0010010001000001 0010001001000010 0010001000100001 0100000100100001 0010000100100010 0010000100010001 0010000010010010 0010000001000010 0010000000100001 0100000010010001 0001001001000001 0001000100100001 0001000010010001 0001000000100010 0001000000010001 0000100000010010 0000010000000010 0010010000100000 0010001000010000 0100000000100010 0010000010000100 0010000000010000 0100001000100000 0001001000100000 0100000100010000 0001000100010000 0001000001000100 0000100100100000 0000100010010000 0100000001000100 0000100000100100 0000100000000100 0000100000000100 0000100000100100 0100000001000100 0000100010010000 0000100100100000 0100000100010000 0001000001000100 0100001000100000 0001000100010000 0001001000100000 0010000000010000 0010000010000100 0100000000010001 0010001000010000 0010010000100000

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3

1000001000100001 0010000010001001 1000000100010000 1000000010001000 1000000100010000 0001000001001001 1000000100100010 1000000100010001 1000000010010010 1000000010001001 1000000001000010 0000100000001001 1000000000100001 0100000001001001 1001001000010010 1001001000001001 1001000100000010 1000000001000100 0100000001001000 1000010000100000 1000001000010000 0010000100001000 1000000100001000 1000000010000100 0001000010001000 0100000010001000 0001000000001000 1000000001000100 0100000001001000 1000010000100000 1000001000010000 0000100001001000 1000000100001000 1000000010000100 0100000010001000 1000100001000000 0000100001001000 1000000010001000 1001001001001000 0001000000001000 1001001000100100 0001000010001000 1001001001001000 1001000010000001 1000100100010010 1000100100001001 0010000100001000 1000100010000010 1000100001000001

1 1 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 3 1 1

1000001000100001 0100001001000001 1000000100010000 1000000010001000 1000000100010000 0100000100100001 1000000100100010 1000000100010001 1000000010010010 1000000010001001 1000000001000010 0100000010010001 1000000000100001 0100000001001001 1001001000010010 1001001000001001 1001000100000010 1000000001000100 0100000001001000 1000010000100000 1000001000010000 0100000000100010 1000000100001000 1000000010000100 0100001000100000 0100000010001000 0100000100010000 1000000001000100 0100000001001000 1000010000100000 1000001000010000 0100000001000100 1000000100001000 1000000010000100 0100000010001000 1000100001000000 0100000001000100 1000000010001000 1001001001001000 0100000100010000 1001001000100100 0100001000100000 1001001001001000 1001000010000001 1000100100010010 1000100100001001 0100000000010001 1000100010000010 1000100001000001

Next State 1 1 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1

© Ecma International 2010

Table G.1 — Main Conversion Table (continued) 8-bit byte

State 1 Code Word msb lsb

95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143

0000001000000010 0000000100000001 0010010010001001 0010010010010010 0010010001000010 0010010000100001 0010001001001001 0010001000100010 0010001000010001 0010000100010010 0010000010000010 0010000100001001 0010000001000001 0001001001000010 0001001000100001 0001000100100010 0001000100010001 0001000010010010 0001000001000010 0001000010001001 0001000000100001 0000100100100001 0000100010010001 0000100001001001 0000100000100010 0000100000010001 0000010000001001 0000010000010010 0010010010000100 0010010000010000 0010001000001000 0010001001000100 0001000100001000 0010000100100100 0000100010001000 0010000100000100 0010000000100000 0001001000010000 0000100000001000 0001000010000100 0001000000010000 0000100100010000 0000100001000100 0000010001001000 0000010010010000 0000010000100100 0000010000000100 0000010000000100 0000010000100100

© Ecma International 2010

Next State

State 2 Code Word msb lsb

Next State

State 3 Code Word msb lsb

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3

0100100100000010 0100100010000001 0100010000100000 0010010010010010 0010010001000010 0010010000100001 0100010010000010 0010001000100010 0010001000010001 0010000100010010 0010000010000010 0100001000010000 0010000001000001 0001001001000010 0001001000100001 0001000100100010 0001000100010001 0001000010010010 0001000001000010 0100010000100000 0001000000100001 0000100100100001 0000100010010001 0100010001000001 0000100000100010 0000100000010001 0100001001000010 0000010000010010 0010010010000100 0010010000010000 0100001000100001 0010001001000100 0100000100100010 0010000100100100 0100000100010001 0010000100000100 0010000000100000 0001001000010000 0100000010010010 0001000010000100 0001000000010000 0000100100010000 0000100001000100 0100000001000010 0000010010010000 0000010000100100 0000010000000100 0000010000000100 0000010000100100

1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 3

1000010010010010 1000010010001001 0010010010001001 1001001000000100 1001001000100100 1000010001000010 0010001001001001 1000010000100001 1000001001001001 1000001000100010 1000001000010001 0010000100001001 1000000100010010 1000000100001001 1000000010000010 1000000001000001 0100000010001001 1001001001001001 1001001000100010 0001000010001001 1001001000010001 1001000100010010 1001000100001001 0000100001001001 1000100100100100 1000100100000100 0000010000001001 1000100000100000 1000010010000100 1000010000010000 0010001000001000 1000001001000100 0001000100001000 1000001000001000 0000100010001000 1000000100100100 1001001000000100 1000100100100100 0000100000001000 1000100000100000 1000010010000100 1000010000010000 1000001001000100 0000010001001000 1000001000001000 1001000010000010 1000000100000100 1000000100100100 1000000100000100

State 4 Next Code Word State msb lsb 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3

0100100100000010 0100100010000001 0100010000100000 1001001000000100 1001001000100100 1000010001000010 0100010010000010 1000010000100001 1000001001001001 1000001000100010 1000001000010001 0100001000010000 1000000100010010 1000000100001001 1000000010000010 1000000001000001 0100000010001001 1001001001001001 1001001000100010 0100010000100000 1001001000010001 1001000100010010 1001000100001001 0100010001000001 1000100100100100 1000100100000100 0100001001000010 1000100000100000 1000010010000100 1000010000010000 0100001000100001 1000001001000100 0100000100100010 1000001000001000 0100000100010001 1000000100100100 1001001000000100 1000100100100100 0100000010010010 1000100000100000 1000010010000100 1000010000010000 1000001001000100 0100000001000010 1000001000001000 1001000010000010 1000000100000100 1000000100100100 1000000100000100

Next State 1 1 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 2 3 3

151

Table G.1 — Main Conversion Table (continued) 8-bit byte

State 1 Code Word msb lsb

144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192

0000010001001000 0000010010010000 0000100000001000 0000100001000100 0000100010001000 0000100100010000 0001000000010000 0001000010000100 0001000100001000 0001001000010000 0010000000100000 0010000100000100 0010000100100100 0010001000001000 0010001001000100 0010010000010000 0010010010000100 0000001000010010 0000001000001001 0000000100000010 0000000010000001 0010010010010001 0010010000100010 0010010001001001 0010010000010001 0010001000010010 0010000100000010 0010001000001001 0010000010000001 0001001000100010 0001001000010001 0001000100010010 0001000010000010 0001001001001001 0001000001000001 0000100100100010 0000100100010001 0001000100001001 0000100010010010 0000100001000010 0000100010001001 0000100000100001 0000010010010001 0000010000100010 0000010001001001 0000010000010001 0000001001001000 0000001000100100 0000001000000100

152

Next State

State 2 Code Word msb lsb

Next State

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2

0100000010000100 0000010010010000 0100000000010000 0000100001000100 0100000010000100 0000100100010000 0001000000010000 0001000010000100 0100001000010000 0001001000010000 0010000000100000 0010000100000100 0010000100100100 0100000000100001 0010001001000100 0010010000010000 0010010010000100 0100000000010000 0100100100100100 0100100100100100 0100100100010010 0010010010010001 0010010000100010 0100100100000100 0010010000010001 0010001000010010 0010000100000010 0100100000100000 0010000010000001 0001001000100010 0001001000010001 0001000100010010 0001000010000010 0100100010000010 0001000001000001 0000100100100010 0000100100010001 0100100000100000 0000100010010010 0000100001000010 0100010010000100 0000100000100001 0000010010010001 0000010000100010 0100100001000001 0000010000010001 0100010010000100 0100010000010000 0100001001000100

2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2

State 3 State 4 Code Word Next Code Word Next msb lsb State msb lsb State 0000010001001000 1001000001000000 0000100000001000 1000000000100000 0000100010001000 1000000000100000 0100000100001000 1000000001000000 0001000100001000 1001000001000001 0100000100001000 1001000100100100 1000100100100010 0010001000001000 1000100100000100 1001001001000100 1001001000001000 1000100100010001 1000100010010010 1000100010001001 1000100001000010 1001000100100100 1001000100000100 0010010001001001 1001001001000100 1000100000100001 1000010010010001 0010001000001001 1000010001001001 1000010000100010 1000010000010001 1000001000010010 1000001000001001 0001001001001001 1000000100000010 1000000010000001 0100100100001001 0001000100001001 0100010010001001 0100001001001001 0000100010001001 1001000000100000 1000100100001000 1000100010000100 0000010001001001 1000100000010000 1000010010001000 1000010001000100 1000010000001000

3 4 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2

0100000010000100 1001000001000000 0100000000010000 1000000000100000 0100000010000100 1000000000100000 0100000100001000 1000000001000000 0100001000010000 1001000001000001 0100000100001000 1001000100100100 1000100100100010 0100000000100001 0100100100000000 1001001001000100 1001001000001000 0100000000010000 0100100100100100 0100100100100100 0100100100010010 1001000100100100 1001000100000100 0100100100000100 1001001001000100 1000100000100001 1000010010010001 0100100000100000 1000010001001001 1000010000100010 1000010000010001 1000001000010010 1000001000001001 0100100010000010 1000000100000010 1000000010000001 0100100100001001 0100100000100000 0100010010001001 0100001001001001 0100010010000100 1001000000100000 1000100100001000 1000100010000100 0100100001000001 1000100000010000 0100010010000100 0100010000010000 0100001001000100

2 4 2 2 3 3 3 4 3 1 2 3 1 1 4 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 2 2 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2

© Ecma International 2010

Table G.1 — Main Conversion Table (continued) 8-bit byte

State 1 State 2 Code Word Next Code Word msb lsb State msb lsb

193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241

0010010010001000 0010010001000100 0010010000001000 0010001000100100 0010001000000100 0010001001001000 0001001001000100 0001000100100100 0001000100000100 0001001000001000 0001000000100000 0000100010000100 0000100000010000 0000100100001000 0000010010001000 0000010001000100 0000010000001000 0000001000000100 0000001000100100 0000001001001000 0000010000001000 0000010001000100 0000010010001000 0000100000010000 0000100010000100 0000100100001000 0001000000100000 0001000100000100 0001000100100100 0001001000001000 0001001001000100 0010001000000100 0010001000100100 0010001001001000 0010010000001000 0010010001000100 0010010010001000 0010000001000000 0000001001001001 0000001000100010 0000001000010001 0000000100010010 0000000100001001 0000000010000010 0000000001000001 0010010000010010 0010001000000010 0010010000001001 0010000100000001

© Ecma International 2010

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0100010000010000 0010010001000100 0100010010010010 0010001000100100 0010001000000100 0100010001000010 0001001001000100 0001000100100100 0001000100000100 0100010000100001 0001000000100000 0000100010000100 0000100000010000 0100001000100010 0100001000010001 0000010001000100 0100000100010010 0100000010000010 0100000100100100 0100000100000100 0100000001000001 0000010001000100 0100000000100000 0000100000010000 0000100010000100 0100000100000100 0001000000100000 0001000100000100 0001000100100100 0100000100100100 0001001001000100 0010001000000100 0010001000100100 0100001001000100 0100100100000100 0010010001000100 0100000000100000 0010000001000000 0100100100100010 0100100010000100 0100100000010000 0100000001000000 0100100100010001 0100100010010010 0100100001000010 0010010000010010 0010001000000010 0100100010000100 0010000100000001

Next State 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 1 2 2 4 1 1 1 1 1 3 1

State 3 State 4 Code Word Next Code Word msb lsb State msb lsb 0010010010001000 1000001001001000 0010010000001000 1000001000100100 1000001000000100 0010001001001000 0100001000001000 1001000000100000 1000100100001000 0001001000001000 1000100010000100 1000010010001000 1000010001000100 0000100100001000 0000010010001000 1000001000100100 0000010000001000 1000010000001000 1000001001001000 1000001000000100 0000010000001000 0100001000001000 0000010010001000 1001001000010000 1001000100000100 0000100100001000 0100000100001001 1001001000010000 1001000100001000 0001001000001000 1001001000001000 1000100000010000 1001001001000010 0010001001001000 0010010000001000 1001000100001000 0010010010001000 1001001000100001 1001000100100010 1001000100010001 1001000010010010 1001000010001001 1001000001000010 1001000000100001 1000100100100001 1000100010010001 1001000010000100 0010010000001001 1001000010000100

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 2

0100010000010000 1000001001001000 0100010010010010 1000001000100100 1000001000000100 0100010001000010 0100001000001000 1001000000100000 1000100100001000 0100010000100001 1000100010000100 1000010010001000 1000010001000100 0100001000100010 0100001000010001 1000001000100100 0100000100010010 0100000010000010 0100000100100100 0100000100000100 0100000001000001 0100001000001000 0100000000100000 1001001000010000 1001000100000100 0100000100000100 0100000100001001 1001001000010000 1001000100001000 0100000100100100 1001001000001000 1000100000010000 1001001001000010 0100001001000100 0100100100000100 1001000100001000 0100000000100000 1001001000100001 0100100100100010 0100100010000100 0100100000010000 0100000001000000 0100100100010001 0100100010010010 0100100001000010 1000100010010001 1001000010000100 0100100010000100 1001000010000100

Next State 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 1 1 3 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 1 1 2 2 4 1 1 1 1 3 3 2

153

Table G.1 — Main Conversion Table (concluded) 8-bit byte

State 1 State 2 State 3 Code Word Next Code Word Next Code Word msb lsb State msb lsb State msb lsb

242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255

0001001000010010 0001000100000010 0001001000001001 0001000010000001 0000100100010010 0000100010000010 0000100100001001 0000100001000001 0000010010010010 0000010001000010 0000010010001001 0000010000100001 0000001001000100 0000001000001000

154

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2

0001001000010010 0001000100000010 0100100000100001 0001000010000001 0000100100010010 0000100010000010 0100010010010001 0000100001000001 0000010010010010 0000010001000010 0100010000100010 0000010000100001 0100010000010001 0100001000010010

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1000000010000000 1000100001001001 0001001000001001 1000100000100010 1000100000010001 1000010000010010 0000100100001001 1000010000001001 1000001000000010 1000000100000001 0000010010001001 0100100010001001 1001000000010000 1000100100010000

Next State 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2

State 4 Code Word Next msb lsb State 1000000010000000 1000100001001001 0100100000100001 1000100000100010 1000100000010001 1000010000010010 0100010010010001 1000010000001001 1000001000000010 1000000100000001 0100010000100010 0100100010001001 0100010000010001 0100001000010010

4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

© Ecma International 2010

Table G.2 — Substitution Table 8-bit byte

State 1 State 2 State 3 State 4 Code Word Next Code Word Next Code Word Next Code Word Next msb lsb State msb lsb State msb lsb State msb lsb State

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

0000010010000000 0000100100000000 0001001000000000 0000001001000000 0000000100100000 0000000010010000 0000000001001000 0000000001001000 0000000010010000 0000000100100000 0000010001000000 0000100010000000 0001000100000000 0010001000000000 0000001000100000 0000000100010000 0000000010001000 0000000001000100 0000000001000100 0000000010001000 0000000100010000 0000001000100000 0000010010000001 0000100100000001 0001001000000001 0010010000000001 0000000001001001 0000000010010001 0000000100100001 0000001001000001 0000100001000000 0001000010000000 0010000100000000 0000010000100000 0000001000010000 0000000100001000 0000000010000100 0000010000100000 0000000010000100 0000000100001000 0000001000010000 0000010001000001 0000010010000010 0000100010000001 0000100100000010 0001000100000001 0001001000000010

© Ecma International 2010

4 4 4 4 3 3 3 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1

0000010010000000 0000100100000000 0001001000000000 0100010000000001 0100100000000010 0100001000000000 0100100000000100 0100000100000000 0100100010010000 0100100000100100 0000010001000000 0000100010000000 0001000100000000 0010001000000000 0100100000000100 0100100010010000 0100001000000001 0100010000000010 0100100000100100 0100100100100000 0100100100100000 0100100000010010 0000010010000001 0000100100000001 0001001000000001 0010010000000001 0100010000000100 0100000100000001 0100010000000100 0100001000000010 0000100001000000 0001000010000000 0010000100000000 0000010000100000 0100010000010010 0100100000010001 0100000010000000 0000010000100000 0100010000100100 0100010000100100 0100100000100010 0000010001000001 0000010010000010 0000100010000001 0000100100000010 0001000100000001 0001001000000010

4 4 4 1 1 4 2 4 3 2 4 4 4 4 3 2 1 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 4 4 4 3 1 1 4 2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0100100001001000 0100100001001000 0100100000001001 1000001000000000 1001000000000100 1001000000100100 1001000001001000 1001000000000100 1001000000100100 1001000001001000 1001001001000000 1000100001001000 0100010001001000 1000100000000100 1001000010010000 1001000100100000 0100100000001000 0100100010001000 1001000010010000 1001000100100000 0100010001001000 0100100000001000 1000100000100100 1000100010010000 0100100010001000 1000100000000100 1000010000000001 1000100000000010 1001000000001001 1001000000010010 1000100000100100 1000100001001000 0100010000001001 0100100001001001 1000100100100000 1001000000001000 1001000001000100 1000001000000001 1000100010010000 1000100100100000 1001000000001000 1000010000000010 1000000100000000 1001000001000100 1000100000001001 1001000010001000 1001000100010000

2 3 1 4 3 3 3 2 2 2 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 1 4 2 1 3 3

0100100001001000 0100100001001000 0100100000001001 0100010000000001 0100100000000010 0100001000000000 0100100000000100 0100000100000000 0100100010010000 0100100000100100 1001001001000000 1000100001001000 0100010001001000 1000100000000100 0100100000000100 0100100010010000 0100001000000001 0100010000000010 0100100000100100 0100100100100000 0100100100100000 0100100000010010 1000100000100100 1000100010010000 0100100010001000 1000100000000100 0100010000000100 0100000100000001 0100010000000100 0100001000000010 1000100000100100 1000100001001000 0100010000001001 0100100001001001 0100010000010010 0100100000010001 0100000010000000 1000001000000001 0100010000100100 0100010000100100 0100100000100010 1000010000000010 1000000100000000 1001000001000100 1000100000001001 1001000010001000 1001000100010000

2 3 1 1 1 4 2 4 3 2 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 3 2 1 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 4 1 3 2 1 1 4 2 1 3 3

155

Table G.2 — Substitution Table (concluded) 8-bit byte

State 1 Code Word Next msb lsb State

State 2 State 3 State 4 Code Word Next Code Word Next Code Word Next msb lsb State msb lsb State msb lsb State

47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87

0010001000000001 0010010000000010 0000000001000010 0000000010001001 0000000010010010 0000000100010001 0000000100100010 0000001000100001 0000001001000010 0001000001000000 0010000010000000 0010010010010000 0010010001001000 0010010000100100 0010010000000100 0001001001001000 0001001000100100 0001001000000100 0000100100100100 0000100100000100 0000100000100000 0000010010000100 0000010000010000 0000001001000100 0000001000001000 0000000100100100 0000000100000100 0000010000010000 0001001001001000 0000010010000100 0000100000100000 0010010001001000 0000100100000100 0000100100100100 0001001000000100 0001001000100100 0010010000000100 0010010000100100 0010010010010000 0000000100000100 0000000100100100

0010001000000001 0010010000000010 0100100010010001 0100100001000100 0100010010010000 0100010010010000 0100100001000100 0100100100100001 0100100100010000 0001000001000000 0010000010000000 0010010010010000 0100100100010000 0010010000100100 0010010000000100 0100000010000001 0001001000100100 0001001000000100 0000100100100100 0000100100000100 0000100000100000 0000010010000100 0000010000010000 0100001000000100 0100100000010000 0100010001000100 0100001000100100 0000010000010000 0100001000000100 0000010010000100 0000100000100000 0100000100000010 0000100100000100 0000100100100100 0001001000000100 0001001000100100 0010010000000100 0010010000100100 0010010010010000 0100001000100100 0100010001000100

156

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 3 3 2 2 1 3 4 4 3 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1000100000010010 0100010000001000 1001000000010001 1001000000100010 1001000001001001 1001000010010001 1001000100100001 1001001001000001 0100001000001001 1001001000100000 1001000010001000 1001000100010000 0010010001001000 1001001000100000 0100001001001000 0001001001001000 0100001001001000 0100010010001000 0100100100001000 1000010000000100 1000010000100100 1000010001001000 1000010010010000 1000100000001000 1000100010001000 1000100100010000 1001000000010000 1000100001000100 0001001001001000 0100010000001000 0100010010001000 0010010001001000 0100100100001000 1000010000000100 1000010000100100 1000010001001000 1000010010010000 1000100000001000 0100010001001001 1000100001000100 1000100010001000

1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2

1000100000010010 0100010000001000 0100100010010001 0100100001000100 0100010010010000 0100010010010000 0100100001000100 0100100100100001 0100100100010000 1001001000100000 1001000010001000 1001000100010000 0100100100010000 1001001000100000 0100001001001000 0100000010000001 0100001001001000 0100010010001000 0100100100001000 1000010000000100 1000010000100100 1000010001001000 1000010010010000 0100001000000100 0100100000010000 0100010001000100 0100001000100100 1000100001000100 0100001000000100 0100010000001000 0100010010001000 0100000100000010 0100100100001000 1000010000000100 1000010000100100 1000010001001000 1000010010010000 1000100000001000 0100010001001001 0100001000100100 0100010001000100

1 3 1 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2

© Ecma International 2010

Annex H (normative) Optimum Power Control

The laser power used for recording a disk is dependent on both the disk and the recorder that are being used, therefore this power shall be determined for the combination of each recorder and disk. Such a determination of the actual optimum recording power Po is called Optimum Power Control (OPC). To facilitate the OPC, a reference values for the recording power is given. This value is encoded as special information in the pre-pits in Lead-in Zone (see Clause 27). This value is the OPC suggested code for a wavelength specified as the Wavelength Code at the reference speed. The OPC shall be performed in an area on the disk that is specially reserved for this purpose: the Inner Disk Testing Area (IDTA) and Outer Disk Testing Area (ODTA) (see Clause 28). The optimum recording power is the laser power at which jitter is minimized at the measuring conditions of the recorded disk specifications (see Clause 13). One example of OPC procedure which makes the determination of Po easier for practical device electronics is described below: The asymmetry of the recorded 8/16 modulated data is different for different recording powers, therefore, the optimum recording power for the specific combination of device and disk can be obtained by test recording 8/16 modulated data with different recording powers, and by measuring the resulting asymmetry in the HF signal. But directly using the definition of asymmetry is too complicated for the device electronics, therefore, a different parameter is defined as a representation of asymmetry. This parameter β is based on using the AC coupled HF signal before equalisation, and is defined as follows: β= (A1+A2) / (A1–A2) where (A1+A2) : the difference between the peak levels A1 and A2 of the HF signal (A1–A2): the peak-to-peak value of the HF signal See Figures H1 to H3. Zero asymmetry of the measured HF signal results in β = 0. β shall be measured with the PUH for recording as specified in 9.1.2, and asymmetry shall be measured with the PUH for reading as specified in 9.1.1 respectively. This means that for each design, a conversion shall be made from recorder read-out conditions to the conditions of the read-only pick-up.

© Ecma International 2010

157

HF signal

HF signal

HF signal

A1

A1

0

0

A1 0

A2 A2

Figure H.1 —  < 0 (Low power)

158

A2

Figure H.2 —  = 0

Figure H.3 —  > 0 (High power)

© Ecma International 2010

Annex I (normative) Measurement of the groove wobble amplitude

The wobble amplitude in nanometres shall be derived from the Normalized Wobble signal (NWO) as shown below.

I.1

Wobble signal (WOb)

The wobble signal shall be calculated from the following equation: WOb / 2 = ( RPS / 2 ) sin (2πa/Tp) therefore WOb = RPS sin (2πa/Tp)

(I)

where (see Figure I.1) WOb:

the peak to peak value of the wobble signal when neighbouring wobbles are in phase (minimum value)

RPS:

the peak to peak value of the radial push-pull signal

a:

wobble amplitude in nanometres

Tp:

track pitch in nm

therefore NWO = WOb / RPS = sin (2πa/ Tp)

(II)

Due to this normalization, the dependency on groove geometry, spot shape and optical aberrations have been eliminated.

I.2

Wobble amplitude

By the definition in equation (II) above, the relation between NWO and the wobble amplitude for the track pitch of 0,74 µm is: Lower limit: 0,06 which corresponds to 7 nm Upper limit: 0,12 which corresponds to 14 nm

© Ecma International 2010

159

Track pitch (Tp) RPS 2 WOb 2

-a

Radial direction

a

-

WOb 2

-RPS 2

Land

Land

Groove Radial error signal

average centre

actual centre

a

Groove wobble Figure I.1 — Groove wobble signal

160

© Ecma International 2010

Annex J (normative) Measurement methods for the operational signals for an unrecorded disk

The following measurement methods shall be used for the measurement of the operationa l signals of an unrecorded disk:  Focusing method:

Astigmatic method

 Tracking method:

Push-pull method

 Land Pre-Pit detection method:

Push-pull method

 Wobble signal detection method:

Push-pull method

J.1 Condition of the summing amplifier in the measurement circuit For the measurements of Radial push-pull tracking error signal, Land Pre-Pit amplitude, the output level of the summing amplifier shall be set to zero when the laser diode on the PUH is turned on and no disk is set on the spindle.

J.2 Condition of the differential amplifier in the measurement circuit For the measurements of Radial push-pull tracking error signal, Land Pre-Pit amplitude, Wobble signal, the output gain of each photo-detector pre-amplifier and the differential balance shall be adjusted to equalize each AC signal amplitude.

J.3 Output gain of the summing and the differential amplifiers For the normalization of Radial push-pull tracking error signal, Land Pre-Pit amplitude, the output gain of the summing and the differential amplifiers shall be exactly equal.

© Ecma International 2010

161

162

© Ecma International 2010

Annex K (normative) NBCA Code

K.1 Location of NBCA and Lead-in Zone The NBCA shall be located between 22,71 ± 0,06 mm and 23,51 ± 0,06 mm from the centre of the centre hole, see Figure K.1. The recordings in the Lead-in Zone shall be performed from the sector number (02D5B0) when the NBCA-Code is applied.

NBCA

Figure K.1 — Outline of NBCA

K.2 Writing form The NBCA shall be written with a series of low reflectance stripes arranged in the circumferential direction. Each of the stripes shall extend fully across the NBCA in the radial direction.

K.3 Modulation method Data bits written in the NBCA-Code are encoded by phase encoding into NBCA-Code channel bits. In the phase encoding, a data bit ZERO shall be changed into NBCA-Code channel bits of 01 and a data bit ONE shall be changed into NBCA-Code channel bits of 10. The NBCA-Code channel bit train shall be modulated by the RZ modulation method. The low reflectance stripes shall be formed corresponding to pulses after the RZ modulation process. The low reflectance stripes shall not exceed half of the NBCA-Code channel bit period. The phase encoding method specified above shall be applied to information data, 4 check bytes of Error Detection Code (EDCNBCA) and 16 bytes of Error Correction Code (ECC NBCA) in NBCA-Data field. In other fields of NBCA-Data structure, a data bit ZERO shall be changed into NBCA-Code channel bits of 10 and a data bit ONE shall be changed into NBCA-Code channel bits of 01. See K.4 and Figure K.2.

K.4 NBCA-Code structure The data in the NBCA-Code consists of a NBCA-Preamble field, a NBCA-Data field and a NBCA-Postamble field. All these fields shall be continuously written without gaps, as shown in Figure K.2.

© Ecma International 2010

163

K.4.1 NBCA-Preamble field The NBCA-Preamble field shall consist of 4 bytes of (00) preceded by a NBCA-Sync-Byte (SBNBCA).

K.4.2 NBCA-Data field In the NBCA-Data field, 16n – 4 bytes of information data (I0, I1...I16n-5), 4 check bytes of Error Detection Code (D0, D1, D2, D3) and 16 bytes of Error Correction Code (C 00...C03, C10...C13,..., C30...C33) shall be written in this order. Where n is a positive integer not greater than 12. A NBCA-Resync (RSNBCA) shall be inserted before every 4 bytes throughout this field.

K.4.3 NBCA-Postamble field The NBCA-Postamble field shall consist of 4 bytes of (55) preceded and followed by NBCA-Resync (RSNBCA). 5 bytes

1byte

4 bytes

SBNBCA

NBCA-Preamble (All (00)) I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7

RSNBCA1 RS NBCA1 RS NBCA1 RS NBCA1 RS NBCA2 : :

1 row row 4 bytes (reserved)

Information

RS NBCAi-1 RS NBCAi RS NBCAi RS NBCAi RS NBCAi RS NBCAi+1

4n rows (1≤n≤12)

: : RS NBCAn-1 RS NBCAn RS NBCAn RS NBCAn RS NBCAn RS NBCA13 RS NBCA13 RS NBCA13 RS NBCA13 RS NBCA14

I16n-8

I16n-7

I16n-6

I16n-5

EDCNBCA (4 bytes) C0,0 C1,0

C2,0 C3,0

ECC NBCA C0,3 C1,3

4 rows

C2,3 C3,3

NBCA-Postamble (All (55))

1 row

RS NBCA15 Figure K.2 — NBCA-Data structure

164

© Ecma International 2010

K.5 NBCA Error Detection Code (EDCNBCA) 4 check bytes of Error Detection Code (D0, D1, D2, D3) (EDCNBCA) shall be attached to the information data (I0, I1....I16n-5). Polynomials EDCNBCA (x) and I NBCA (x) are defined as follows: 31

EDC NBCA (x) =  bi xi i=0 128n-1 I NBCA (x) =  bi xi i = 32 where, i is the bit number starting with 0 and incremented from the LSB of the last byte of EDC NBCA toward the MSB of the first byte of the information data, and bi represents the value of i-th bit. The polynomial EDCNBCA (x) shall be calculated as follows: EDCNBCA (x) = INBCA (x) mod G(x) where, G(x) = x 32 + x 31 + x 4 + 1 .

K.6 NBCA Error Correction Code (ECCNBCA) A Reed-Solomon type ECC with 4-way interleaving shall be used for the information data and the EDC NBCA. Polynomials RNBCAj(x) and INBCAj(x) are defined as follows: 3 R NBCAj (x) =  C j,i x 3-i i=0 4n-2

I NBCAj (x) =  I (j+4i) x 51-i + D j x 52-4n i=0

where, Im represents the value of the m-th information data byte and Dk represents the value of k-th EDCNBCA byte. The polynomial RNBCAj(x) shall be calculated as follows: RNBCAj(x) = INBCAj(x) mod GpNBCA(x) 3 GpNBCA (x) =  ( x + k ) k=0 where,  represents the root of the polynomial; Gp(x) = x8 + x4 + x3 + x2 + 1

© Ecma International 2010

165

K.7 NBCA-Sync-Byte (SBNBCA) and NBCA-Resync (RSNBCA) The NBCA-Sync-Byte (SBNBCA) precedes the NBCA-Preamble. The NBCA-Resync (RSNBCA) shall be inserted before every 4 information bytes, before the EDCNBCA, before the ECCNBCA, and before and after the NBCA-Postamble. The NBCA-Sync-Byte and the NBCA-Resync shall have patterns as shown in Table K.1. Table K. 1 — Bit pattern of NBCA-Sync-Byte and NBCA-Resync Bit pattern

Sync Byte Fixed pattern (Channel bit) C 15 C 14 C 13 C 12 C 11 C 10 C 9

C8

SBNBCA

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

RSNBCA1

0

1

0

0

0

1

RS NBCA2

0

1

0

0

0

1

/Resync

: : : RS NBCAi

b0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

: : : 0

1

0

0

: : : RS NBCA15

b3

Sync Code (Data bit) b2 b1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

: : : i : : :

: : : 0

1

0

0

Recorded in RZ mod.

1

1

Recorded in PE-RZ mod.

K.8 NBCA signal specifications The read-out signal from the NBCA by an optical pick-up specified in the measuring conditions in 9.1.1 and 9.1.2 shall satisfy the NBCA signal specifications. The NBCA read-out signal shall be obtained by summing the currents of the four elements of the quadrant photo detector, when the light beam crosses the tracks.

K.8.1 NBCA signal amplitude The signal level corresponding to a high and a low reflectance shall be IBH and IBL respectively and the zero level shall be the signal level obtained from the measuring device when no disk is inserted, as shown in Figure K.3. These signals shall satisfy the following specification: IBL / IBH : 0,50 max.

K.8.2 NBCA time period The edge position of the NBCA signal shall be the position at which the NBCA signal crosses the averaged level between IBH and IBL. The time period of NBCA shall satisfy the following specifications, when the rotation speed of a disk is 1 440 rpm (24 Hz). See Figure K.3.

166

© Ecma International 2010

Leading edge time period (TPl)

: 8,89n µs ± 2,00 µs (n = 1, 2, 3 or 4)

Pulse length (TL)

: 3,00 µs ± 1,50 µs

IBH

(IBH + IBL) / 2

IBL 0 Level TL TP1

Figure K.3 — Read-out signal from NBCA

K.8.3 NBCA jitter value The jitter value shall be defined as the normalized standard deviation of the Leading edge time period (TPl) and shall satisfy the following specification: Jitter value < 8 %

Measuring method: a) Signal condition: Raw NBCA signal without filtering b) Rotation speed: 1 440 rpm (24 Hz) c) Measuring position: r = 23,1 mm (around the centre of NBCA lines) d) Slice level of Time Interval Analyser shall be set to the half depth of NBCA pulse signal e) Jitter value: σ/ 8,89 where σ[µs] is the standard deviation of TPl when n = 1 8,89 [µs] is the standard value of TPl when n = 1

K.9 Logical format of information data The NBCA-Data field shall have (16n – 4) bytes of information data (I0, I1...I16n-5) as specified in K.4.2. This information data shall be recorded on a unit of NBCA Record. The length of NBCA Record shall be a multiple of 4 bytes. Each NBCA Record shall consist of NBCA Record ID field, Version number field, Data length field and Record data field as shown in Table K.2.

© Ecma International 2010

167

Table K.2 — NBCA Record format Relative Byte Position (RBP)

Contents

Number of bytes

0 to 1

NBCA Record ID

2 bytes

2

Version number

1 byte

3

Data length

1 byte

4 to 4m+3

Record data

4m bytes

m: positive integer RBP 0 to 1 - NBCA Record ID This field shall be the NBCA Record ID assigned uniquely for each NBCA Record. RBP 2 - Version number This field shall be the Version number assigned for each NBCA Record independently. RBP 3 - Data length This field shall specify the length of Record data. RBP 4 to 4m+3 - Record data This field shall be a multiple of 4 bytes and shall contain the Record data only. The NBCA Record ID shall be defined commonly for all DVD Physical Specifications, and shall be classified into two categories as shown in Table K.3. Table K.3 — Categories of NBCA Record ID NBCA Record ID

Definition

(0000) – (7FFF)

Assigned for authorized applications

(8000) – (FFFF)

Assigned for notified applications

When two or more NBCA Records are recorded in the NBCA-Data field, each NBCA Record shall have a different NBCA Record ID and shall be recorded in ascending order of NBCA Record ID. The trailing zeros may be padded in order to adjust for (16n – 4) bytes of information data. An example of information data is shown in Table K.4. Table K.4 — An example of information data Byte Position

Contents

Number of bytes

0 to 11

NBCA Record No.1 (Record data length of 8 bytes)

12 bytes

12 to 31

NBCA Record No.2 (Record data length of 16 bytes)

20 bytes

32 to 43

Trailing zeros

12 bytes

168

© Ecma International 2010

Annex L (normative) Border Zone

L.1 Border Zone construction The Border Zone and Superficial Border Zone are linking regions that prevent the optical pick-up from over running when a non-finalized disk is played back on a DVD-Read-only drive. The Border Zone shall consist of the current Border-out and the next Border-in. The Border Zone shall have 3 Next Border Markers to denote the next Bordered area. When a disk is written with Format4 RMD, the Superficial Border Zone shall be written to Layer 1 symmetrical with the Border Zone written on Layer 0. The structure shall be as specified by Figure L.1. Border Zone Current Border-out

Next Border-in

Superficial Border Zone Superficial Border-out

ECC Block address

Superficial Border-in

Y

X

Z

Superficial Layer 1

Layer 0

ECC Block address

X

Superficial Border-out

Border-in

Current Border-out

Next Border-in

Y

Z

Figure L.1 — Structure of Border Zone Examples of Border recordings in Information Zone are shown in Figure L.2.

© Ecma International 2010

169

a) Open status without Bordered area Invisible RZone No.1 Linking Loss Area Data Recordable Zone Lead-out Zone Lead-in Zone

Extra Border Zone

b) Close status

Superficial Border-out

Complete RZone No.1

Invisible RZone No.2

Bordered area Data Recordable Zone Lead-out Zone Border-out

Lead-in Zone

Extra Border Zone Linking Loss Area

Border-in

c) Open status with Bordered area Superficial Border-out Complete RZone No.1

Invisible RZone No.2

Bordered area Data Recordable Zone Lead-out Zone Border-out

Lead-in Zone

Extra Border Zone Linking Loss Area Border-in

d) Finalized status Superficial Border-out Complete RZone No.1

Superficial Border-in Bordered area

Bordered area

Lead-out Zone Lead-in Zone

Border-out

Extra Border Zone

Linking Loss Area Border-in

Border-out

Linking Loss Area shifted Middle Zone

Figure L.2 — Examples of Border Recording in Information Zone

170

© Ecma International 2010

L.2 Border Zone Size The size of a Border Zone shall depend on its location. The minimum sector number of a Border-out shall be larger than (03 FEFF). A Border-out shall be started at an ECC block boundary. The size of a Border Zone on Layer 0 shall be as shown in Table L.1. Table L.1 — Border Zone Size on Layer 0 First PSN of a Border-out

(03FF00) (0B25FF)

to (0B2600) (1656FF)

Border Zone size

1 844 ECC blocks

to

2 442 ECC blocks

(16 5700) to End sector number of Layer 0 2 972 ECC blocks

According to Border Zone Size specified in Table L.1, the Border Zone becomes at least 0.4 mm in radial direction. When Border-out and Middle Zone or Border-out and shifted Middle Zone are connected, Border-out size can be reduced as long as total size satisfy the defined size. See L.4.2.

L.3 Border Zone Information L.3.1 Border Zone construction The Border Zone construction shall be as shown in Figure L.3. The contents of each unit shall be as shown in Table L.2. Each unit shall consist of 1 ECC Block.

Border Zone Current Border-out

0 1 2 3 4 ••••

Copies of RMD

One unit: 1 ECC block (16 sectors)

Next Border-in

••••

Stop Block

••••

No.1

••••

No.2

••••

N N N N N N N

+1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6

No.3

Next Border Marker

Figure L.3 — Border Zone Information Structure The address of the first Next Border Marker is calculated as follows: Address of the first Next Border Marker =

((Start sector number of the next Border-in) + (Start sector number of the current Border-out)) / 2

The start sector number of the next Border-in and the start sector number of the current Border-out shall be recorded in the Lead-in Zone or the Border-in.

© Ecma International 2010

171

Table L.2 — Content of Border Zone Information

Border-out

Border-in

Unit Position (UP)

Contents

0 to 4

Current RMD

5 to 36

Set to (00)

37 and 38

Stop Block

39 to M-1

Set to (00)

M and M+1

Next Border Marker No.1

M+2

Block SYNC Guard Area No.1

M+3 to M+9

Set to (00)

M+10 and M+11

Next Border Marker No.2

M+12

Block SYNC Guard Area No.2

M+13 to M+19

Set to (00)

M+20 and M+21

Next Border Marker No.3

M+22

Block SYNC Guard Area No.3

M+23 to N-1

Set to (00)

N

Linking Loss Area

N+1 to N+5

Updated Physical format information blocks

N+6

Block SYNC Guard Area

Unit Position corresponds to the relative position from the beginning of Border Zone. M and N depend on the location of each Border Zone. UP 0 to 4 - Current RMD In this area, 5 copies of the latest RMD shall be recorded from the beginning of the Border-out. The Data type bit of the sectors in 5 copies of the Current RMD shall be set to ZERO. UP 5 to 36 All bytes shall be set to (00). UP 37 and 38 - Stop Block The area type of the Stop Block shall be a Lead-out attribute and the Main Data of this block shall be set to (00). UP 39 to M-1 All bytes shall be set to (00). UP M and M+1 - Next Border Marker No.1 The Next Border Marker shall be arranged in the Border-out of Border Zone, to indicate whether the next Bordered Area is followed to this Border Zone or not. If there is no next Bordered Area, the Next Border Marker shall not be recorded.

172

© Ecma International 2010

If there is a next Bordered Area, the Next Border Marker shall be recorded with (00) or the data that is identical with the recorded data in Updated Physical format information block in the same Border Zone, see Table L.2. The structure of the Next Border Marker shall be as shown in Figure L.4. When the Updated Physical format information block is recorded on the Next Border Marker, it shall be recorded two times by Lossless-Link scheme on each Next Border Marker (No.1 to No.3). See 23.3. When a disk is finalized, the contents of each Next Border Marker shall be set to (00) with Middle Zone attribute.

Block SYNC Guard Area No.1 Next Border Marker No.1 Unit M-1

Unit M

Unit M+1

Unit M+2

1 ECC block Unrecorded state Figure L.4 — Structure of Next Border Marker UP M+2 - Block SYNC Guard Area No.1 The Block SYNC Guard Area shall be used to read data in the following ECC blocks. After recording of the Next Border Marker, this block shall be the Linking Loss Area. See Clause 23. UP M+3 to M+9 All bytes shall be set to (00). UP M+10 and M+11 - Next Border Marker No.2 This field shall be as specified in (UP M to M+1) Next Border Marker No.1. UP M+12 - Block SYNC Guard Area No.2 This field shall be as specified in (UP M+2) Block SYNC Guard Area No.1. UP M+13 to M+19 All bytes shall be set to (00). UP M+20 and M+21 - Next Border Marker No.3 This field shall be as specified in (UP M to M+1) Next Border Marker No.1. UP M+22 - Block SYNC Guard Area No.3 This field shall be as specified in (UP M+2) Block SYNC Guard Area No.1. UP M+23 to N-1 All bytes shall be set to (00).

© Ecma International 2010

173

UP N - Linking Loss Area See Clause 23. UP N+1 to N+5 - Updated Physical format information blocks This block shall be as shown in Figure L.5. The same block shall be recorded five times in this field. The contents of these bytes shall be copied from the Pre-recorded Physical format information except the DL indicator (Byte 0), the Maximum transfer rate of a disk (Byte 1), the Updated Data Zone allocation (Bytes 4 to 15), the Updated Start sector number of the current Border-out (Bytes 32 to 35), the Updated Start sector number of the next Border-in (Bytes 36 to 39) and Byte 42. See 25.1.6.1. Relative sector number 0

Updated Physical format information

1

Manufacturing information *

2 3 . All (00)

. .

15 * See 25.1.3.1 Figure L.5 — Structure of Updated Physical format information block

Table L.3 — Updated Physical format information BP

174

Contents

Number of bytes

0

Disk Category and DL indicator

1

1

Disk size and Maximum transfer rate of the disk

1

2

Disk structure

1

3

Recorded density

1

4 to 15

Updated Data Zone allocation

12

16

NBCA descriptor

1

17

Maximum recording speed

1

18

Minimum recording speed

1

19 to 25

Recording speed table

7

26

Class

1

27

Extended Version number

1

28 to 31

Set to (00)

4

© Ecma International 2010

Table L.3 — Updated Physical format information (concluded) BP

Contents

Number of bytes

32 to 39

Updated Start sector number of Border Zone

8

40

Pre-recorded information code

1

41

Tracking polarity flag and AR flag

1

42

Re-mapping data Block Valid Flag (RBVF)

1

43 to 511

Set to (00)

469

512 to 2 047

Extended pre-recorded information

1 536

Byte 0 - Disk Category and DL indicator This field shall be as specified in 25.1.3.2. Byte 1 - Disk size and Maximum transfer rate of the disk. This field shall be as specified in 25.1.3.2. Byte 2 - Disk structure This field shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1. Byte 3 - Recorded density This field shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1. Bytes 4 to 15 - Updated Data Zone allocation This field shall be as defined in Table L.4. Table L.4 — Updated Data Zone allocation BP

Contents

4

Set to (00)

5 to7

Start sector number of the Data Zone (030000)

8

Set to (00)

9 to 11

Maximum recorded sector number of the Data Zone

12

Set to (00)

13 to 15

Maximum recorded sector number of the Data Zone on Layer 0

Bytes 13 to 15 indicate the End sector number of Layer 0. Byte 16 - NBCA descriptor This field shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1. Byte 17 - Maximum recording speed This field shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1.

© Ecma International 2010

175

Byte 18 - Minimum recording speed This field shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1. Bytes 19 to 25 - Recording speed table This field shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1. Byte 26 - Class This field shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1. Byte 27 - Extended Version number This field shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1. Bytes 28 to 31 These bytes shall be set to (00). Bytes 32 to 39 - Updated Start sector number of Border Zone This field shall be as defined in Table L.5. Table L.5 — Updated Start sector number of Border Zone BP

Contents

32 to 35

Start sector number of the current Border-out

36 to 39

Start sector number of the next Border-in

The Start sector number of the current Border-out field shall specify the start sector number of the Border-out of the current Bordered Area. The Start sector number of the next Border-in field shall specify the start sector number of the Border-in of the next Bordered Area. In the case that this field is set to (00), the next Bordered Area shall not be recorded. Byte 40 - Pre-recorded information code This field shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1. Byte 41 - Tracking polarity flag and AR flag This field shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1. Byte 42 - Re-mapping data Block Valid Flag (RBVF) This field shall be as specified in 25.1.3.2. Bytes 43 to 511 These bytes shall be set to (00). Bytes 512 to 2 047 - Extended pre-recorded information This field shall be as specified in 25.1.6.1.

176

© Ecma International 2010

UP N+6 - Block SYNC Guard Area This field shall be as specified in (UP M+2) Block SYNC Guard Area No.1.

L.3.2 Superficial Border Zone construction The contents of each unit in the Superficial Border Zone shall be as shown in Table L.6. Table L.6 — Configuration of Superficial Border Zone

Border-out

Border-in

Unit Position (UP)

Contents

0

Set to (00)

1

APD No.4(Anchor Point Data No.4)

2

APD No.3(Anchor Point Data No.3)

3

APD No.2(Anchor Point Data No.2)

4

APD No.1(Anchor Point Data No.1)

5 to N-1

Set to (00)

N

Linking Loss Area

N+1

Set to (00)

N+2

APD No.4(Anchor Point Data No.4)

N+3

APD No.3(Anchor Point Data No.3)

N+4

APD No.2(Anchor Point Data No.2)

N+5

APD No.1(Anchor Point Data No.1)

N+6

Linking Loss Area

Unit Position indicates relative position from the most inner position of Border Zone on Layer 1. N depends on the location of each Superficial Border Zone. UP 0 All bytes shall be set to (00). UP 1 to 4 - APD No.n (n=4, 3, 2, 1) These fields shall specify Anchor Point Data No.4 to No.1 in the inner Bordered area which this Border-out adjoins. When Re-mapping data Block Valid Flag No.n (n = 1 to 4) of Byte 42 in the Physical format information is set to ONE, Anchor Point Data No.n (n = 1 to 4) shall be copied from the ECC block data pointed by Re-mapping block sector number for AP No.n (n = 1 to 4) in Format4 RMD Field3. When Re-mapping data Block Valid Flag No.n of Byte 42 in the Physical format information is set to ZERO, all APD No.n shall be set to (00). See 25.1.3.2. UP 5 to N-1 All bytes shall be set to (00).

© Ecma International 2010

177

UP N - Linking Loss Area See Clause 23. UP N+1 All bytes shall be set to (00). UP N+2 to N+5 - APD No.n (n=4, 3, 2, 1) These fields shall specify Anchor Point Data No.4 to No.1 in the outer Bordered area which this Border-in adjoins. When Re-mapping data Block Valid Flag No.n (n = 1 to 4) of Byte 42 in the Physical format information is set to ONE, Anchor Point Data No.n (n = 4 to 1) shall be copied from the ECC block data pointed by Re-mapping block sector number for AP No.n (n = 1 to 4) in Format4 RMD Field3. When Re-mapping data Block Valid Flag No.n of Byte 42 in the Physical format information is set to ZERO, all APD No.n shall be set to (00). See 25.1.3.2. UP N+6 - Linking Loss Area See Clause 23.

L.4 Border-out and Reduced Border-out Border-out that are followed by the Middle Zone, and Reduced Border-out that are followed by the Middle Zone, are regions that prevent the optical pick up from over running when a disk is played back on a DVDRead-only drive. Bordered area shall be located between the Extra Border Zone or the Border-in and the Border-out or the Reduced Border-out. At the end of the Data Zone, the Middle Zone shall be placed after the Border-out that can be the Reduced Border-out. The example structures after Finalization in the Incremental recording mode are shown in Figure L.6. (a) Single Bordered area with normal Border-out

Layer 1

Lead-out Zone

Data Zone

SBO

Middle Zone

Layer 0

Lead-in Zone

Data Zone

BO

Middle Zone

End Sector number of Layer 0 BO: Border-out SBO: Superficial Border-out

178

© Ecma International 2010

(b) Single Bordered area with Reduced Border-out Middle Zone attribute

Layer 1

Lead-out Zone

Data Zone

RSBO

Middle Zone

Layer 0

Lead-in Zone

Data Zone

RBO

Middle Zone

7 ECC Blocks

RBO: Reduced Border-out

End sector number of Layer 0

RSBO: Reduced Superficial Border-out

(c) Single Bordered area with the minimum Reduced Border-out

Middle Zone attribute RSBO Layer 1

Lead-out Zone

Data Zone

Middle Zone

Layer 0

Lead-in Zone

Data Zone

Middle Zone

RBO

7 ECC blocks End Sector number of Layer 0

(d) Multiple Bordered areas with Border-out

Layer 1

Lead-out Zone

Data Zone

Superficial Border Zone

Data Zone

SBO or RSBO

Middle Zone

Layer 0

Lead-in Zone

Data Zone

Border Zone

Data Zone

BO or RBO

Middle Zone

BO: Border-out

End Sector number of Layer 0

RBO: Reduced Border-out SBO: Superficial Border-out RSBO: Reduced Superficial Border-out Figure L.6 — Examples of the Information Zone structure after Finalization

© Ecma International 2010

179

L.4.1 Construction of Border-out followed by Middle Zone The contents of each unit shall be as shown in Table L.7. Each unit shall consist of 1 ECC block. Table L.7 — Configuration of Border-out followed by Middle Zone Contents Unit position Border-out

Superficial Border-out

0

Current RMD

Set to (00)

1

Current RMD

APD No.4 (Anchor Point Data No.4)

2

Current RMD

APD No.3 (Anchor Point Data No.3)

3

Current RMD

APD No.2 (Anchor Point Data No.2)

4

Current RMD

APD No.1 (Anchor Point Data No.1)

5 to 36

Set to (00)

37 and 38

Stop Block

39 to M-1

Set to (00)

M and M+1

Next Border Marker No.1

M+2

Block SYNC Guard Area No.1

M+3 to M+9

Set to (00)

M+10 and M+11

Next Border Marker No.2

M+12

Block SYNC Guard Area No.2

M+13 to M+19

Set to (00)

M+20 and M+21

Next Border Marker No.3

M+22

Block SYNC Guard Area No.3

M+23 to N-1

Set to (00)

N

Linking Loss Area

Block SYNC Guard Area

N + 1 to

(Middle Zone)

(Middle Zone)

Set to (00)

Unit position indicates the relative position from the most inner position of Border Zone. Content of each Unit Position is the same as that of Table L.2 and Table L.6.

L.4.2 Construction of Reduced Border-out followed by Middle Zone When enough area is not remained for the Border-out followed by the Middle Zone or the Border-out is followed by the shifted Middle Zone, Border-out can be reduced from Unit position N of Table L.7. The minimum configuration of Reduced Border-out is shown in Table L.8.

180

© Ecma International 2010

When the minimum configuration of Reduced Border-out is applied, the start sector number of the Unit Position 1 of the Reduced Border-out shall be set in the following fields: -

"Start sector number of the current Border-out" field in the Updated Physical format information of the last Border-in. See L.3.1.

-

"Start sector number of Border-out No.n" field in the latest RMD. See 28.3.2.2.4. Table L.8 — Configuration of Reduced Border-out followed by Middle Zone Contents Unit Position Reduced Border-out

Superficial Reduced Border-out

0

Linking Loss Area

Block SYNC Guard Area

1

Current RMD

Set to (00)

2

Current RMD

APD No.4 (Anchor Point Data No.4)

3

Current RMD

APD No.3 (Anchor Point Data No.3)

4

Current RMD

APD No.2 (Anchor Point Data No.2)

5

Current RMD

APD No.1 (Anchor Point Data No.1)

6

Set to (00)

Block SYNC Guard Area

7 to

(Middle Zone)

(Middle Zone)

Unit position corresponds to the relative position from the most inner position of Border Zone.

© Ecma International 2010

181

182

© Ecma International 2010

Annex M (normative) Measurement method of the Land Pre-Pit signal

M.1 Block diagram for measurement The measurement method block diagram for measuring the Land Pre-Pit signal is shown in Figure M.1. An example of the Land Pre-Pit detector is shown in Figure M.2.

Amp.

Gain adjust

+ +

Ia

Ib

Amp.

Balance adjust

+ -

(Ia+Ib)-(Ic+Id)

Gain adjust Land Pre-Pit detector

Id

Ic

Amp.

Gain adjust

Amp.

Gain adjust

Pre-pit decoder

+ + + +

Ia+Ib+Ic+Id

LPF1

Figure M.1 — Block diagram for measuring the Land Pre-Pit signal

Comp

Over level limiter

BPF

Noise gate

Pre-pit decoder

+ + V1

From wobble PLL 140 kHz V2

Comp

Figure M.2 — Example of the Land Pre-Pit detector The over level limiter is provided to exclude noise larger than the wobble amplitude. V1 and V2 are proper voltage for each equipment. Band Pass Filter: 4th order centre frequency = 140,6 kHz (wobble frequency) cut-off frequency = ± 42,2 kHz (–3 dB)

© Ecma International 2010

183

184

© Ecma International 2010

Annex N (normative) Construction of Information Zone

N.1 Construction with Format1 RMD Examples of the Information Zone structure with Format1 RMD are shown in Figure N.1.

Information Zone Data Zone Layer 1

Recorded area Lead-out Zone

Middle Zone

Layer 0

Recorded area Lead-in Zone

Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0

Middle Zone

Information Zone Data Recordable Zone Layer 1

Recorded area Lead-out Zone

Lead-out Zone

Middle Zone

Recorded area

Layer 0 Lead-in Zone

Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0

Middle Zone

Figure N.1 — Examples of Information Zone with Format1 RMD

N.2 Construction with Format4 RMD Examples of the Information Zone structure with Format4 RMD are shown in Figure N.2.

© Ecma International 2010

185

Information Zone Data Zone Layer 1

Recorded area Lead-out Zone

Middle Zone

Layer 0

Recorded area Lead-in Zone

Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0

Middle Zone

Initial Information Zone Data Recordable Zone Layer 1

Recorded area Lead-out Zone

Layer 0

shifted Middle Zone

fixed Middle Zone

shifted Middle Zone

fixed Middle Zone

Recorded area Lead-in Zone

Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0

Initial Information Information Zone area Initial Data Data Recordable Recordable Zone area Layer 1 Lead-out Zone

shifted Middle Zone

fixed Middle Zone

Layer 0 Lead-in Zone

RZone #n

shifted Middle Zone

fixed Middle Zone

Last address of Data Recordable Zone on Layer 0 BSGA : Block SYNC Guard Area

Figure N.2 — Examples of Information Zone with Format4 RMD

186

© Ecma International 2010

Annex O (normative) Recording order

O.1 Recording order for disk testing The following Recording order for each layer shall be used for disk testing: -

Layer 1 shall be recorded through the recorded Layer 0 area.

-

The radial dimension of the area to be recorded on Layer 1 shall be smaller than the recorded area on Layer 0 keeping some clearance.

-

When the edge of the recorded area on Layer 0 is shifted by additional recording, the edge of recordable area on Layer 1 can be shifted corresponding to the amount of additional recording on Layer 0.

It is recommended that Layer 0 should be recorded more than 0,5 mm and Layer 1 should be recorded with Clearance more than 0,2 mm from each edge of recorded Layer 0.

Edge of the recorded area on Layer 0 A

Edge of the recordable area on Layer 1

Edge of the recorded area on Layer 0 A

Recordable area on Layer 1

Layer 1 Space layer

Recorded area on Layer 0

Layer 0

Laser beam focusing cone Center of the Laser beam to record NOTE

A is the clearance to keep the recording order.

Figure O.1 — Recordable area on Layer 1

© Ecma International 2010

187

188

© Ecma International 2010

Annex P (normative) Clearance in the number of sectors

P.1 Clearance to keep the Recording order Clearance to keep the Recording order, which is defined in terms of physical distance, shall be converted into the number of sectors to be implemented in recording devices. At the outer most location on the disk, the first Physical sector number X of Layer 1 is located toward the inner side from the last Physical sector number X of Layer 0 to secure the physical distance as clearance to keep the Recording order. Relation between physical distance and the number of physical sectors shall be as shown in Figure P.1. M

M  Ax

M  Ax  AM

a

Layer 1

X

X  Ax

a

Layer 0 M

X

: Clearance to keep the Recording order X, X

: Physical sector number (PSN) of outer most side. "X" is the last recordable address of Layer 0.

M, M

: Physical sector number (PSN)

Ax

: Clearance to keep the Recording order in the number of sectors at "X" where " X  Ax " is the PSN of a sector which is located at the same radius of "X".

AM

: Clearance to keep the Recording order in the number of sectors at "M" where " M  Ax " is the PSN of a sector which is located at the same radius of "M".

a

: Physical distance. "a" is the clearance to keep the Recording order.

RM

: Radius position of "M"

Figure P.1 — Relation between physical distance and number of physical sectors

© Ecma International 2010

189

P.2 Example of the clearance in the number of sectors (Informative) It is useful to simplify the clearance in the number of sectors to keep the Recording order from a viewpoint of compatibility between each product. AM in Table P.1 should be used for the clearance in the number of sectors to keep the Recording order at the location of M. Table P.1 — Clearance in the number of sectors to keep Recording order M

RM [mm]

AM

(030000)

(04318F)

24.00

26.09

(1000)

(043190)

(088F4F)

26.09

32.61

(1400)

(088F50)

(0DE64F)

32.61

39.13

(1800)

(0DE650)

(1434FF)

39.13

45.65

(1C00)

(143500)

(1B7C0F)

45.65

52.17

(2000)

AX

(23E0)

(1B7C10)

190

52.17

(23E0)

© Ecma International 2010

Annex Q (normative) Anchor Point Re-mapping

Q.1 General This Annex describes the Re-mapping mechanism for physical layer. Logical Sector Number (LSN) 16, 256, N – 256 (Where N is the maximum last recorded address in logical volume space) and N are used to fix the Volume and File Structure. Re-mapping is specified to allow the update for LSN = 16, 256, N – 256 and N.

Q.2 Anchor Point Re-mapping 4 Anchor Points (AP No.n, n = 1 to 4) are defined in Table Q.1. Re-mapping original AP No.n (n = 1 to 4) are defined in Table Q.2. Re-mapping original AP No.n (n = 1 to 4) specify the start sector number of the ECC block that includes AP No.n (n = 1 to 4). Table Q.1 — Anchor Point (AP No.n) Anchor Point

Contents

AP1

(030010): LSN 16

AP2

(030100): LSN 256

AP3

(Maximum Last Recorded Address – 256) of Layer 1

AP4

(Maximum Last Recorded Address) of Layer 1

Table Q.2 — Re-mapping original Anchor Point (AP No.n) block Anchor Point

Contents

Remapping original AP1

(030010): LSN 16

Remapping original AP2

(030100): LSN 256

Remapping original AP3

Start sector number of the ECC block that includes AP3

Remapping original AP4

Start sector number of the ECC block that includes AP4

Q.3 Anchor Point Data in Border Zone Each Re-mapped Anchor Point Data (APD No.n, n = 1 to 4) in the Superficial Border Zone shall be copied from the ECC block data pointed by Re-mapping block sector number for AP No.n in Format4 RMD Field3.

© Ecma International 2010

191

When the each Re-mapped data Block Valid Flag (RBVF No.n, n = 1 to 4, see 25.1.3.2) in the physical information block located in the Lead-in Zone and Extra Border-in is set to ONE, the first Bordered Area does not contain Video/Audio/Stream recording data; See Annex M.

Q.4 Border structure with Re-mapping An example structure after closing the Border Zone is shown in Figure Q.1.

reserved

APD No.4

APD No.3

APD No.2

Bordered area No.1 Anchor Point No.3

Address D

Anchor Point No.4

Address C

APD No.1

Bordered area No. 2

Lead-out Zone

Unrecorded

Lead-in Zone

Unrecorded Border-out

Anchor Point No.1 Anchor Point No.2

Border-in

Border-in Address A

Border-out

Address B

Figure Q.1 — Example of Border structure with Re-mapping

Address A is the Re-mapping ECC block sector number in the Bordered area No.2 for Anchor Point No.1. Address B is the Re-mapping ECC block sector number in the Bordered area No.2 for Anchor Point No.2. Address C is the Re-mapping ECC block sector number in the Bordered area No.2 for Anchor Point No.3. Address D is the Re-mapping ECC block sector number in the Bordered area No.2 for Anchor Point No.4.

APD No.1 is the copy of the ECC Block data beginning from Address A. APD No.2 is the copy of the ECC Block data beginning from Address B. APD No.3 is the copy of the ECC Block data beginning from Address C. APD No.4 is the copy of the ECC Block data beginning from Address D.

192

© Ecma International 2010

Annex R (informative) Measurement method of the Space layer thickness in a disk

R.1 Laser focusing method A laser is focused on each information layer of a disk by an objective lens. The Space layer thickness is determined by measuring the range of the object lens' movement.

R.2 Interferometer method Light with varying wavelength is irradiated onto a disk. The Space layer thickness is determined by measuring the phase difference between the reflected light from Layer 0 and the reflected light from Layer 1.

Substrate Substrate

d d

Space (n) Space layer layer(n)

Substrate Substrate

Reflected Reflectedlight lightintensity intensity

R1 R1 R2 R2

00 450 450

500 500

550 550

600 600

λ1 ?1

λ2 ?2

650 650

700 700

750 750

800 800

Wavelength (nm) (nm) Wavelength

Figure R.1 — Space layer thickness measurement

Refractive Index of the Space layer ; n Thickness of the Space layer

;d

λ1 · λ2 d=

2n (λ1 – λ2)

© Ecma International 2010

193

194

© Ecma International 2010

Annex S (informative) Transportation

S.1 General As transportation occurs under a wide range of temperature and humidity variations, for differing periods, by many methods of transport and in all parts of the world, it is not possible to specify mandatory conditions for transportation or for packaging.

S.2 Packaging The form of packaging should be agreed between sender and recipient or, in absence of such an agreement, is the responsibility of the sender. It should take into account the following hazards.

S.2.1 Temperature and humidity Insulation and wrapping should be designed to maintain the conditions for storage over the estimated period of transportation.

S.2.2 Impact loads and vibrations a)

Avoid mechanical loads that would distort the shape of the disk.

b)

Avoid dropping the disk.

c)

Disks should be packed in a rigid box containing adequate shock-absorbent material.

d)

The final box should have a clean interior and a construction that provides sealing to prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture.

© Ecma International 2010

195

© Ecma International 2009

Related documents

Record · ID 600248 · SHA-256 d7017ab70c89472a
Conceptio Open Knowledge Archive — every document is proof-bundled with source, license, and retrieval metadata.